Brother MFC 795CW User Manual

USER’S GUIDE  
MFC-795CW  
Version 0  
USA/CAN  
Brother numbers  
IMPORTANT  
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be  
made from within that country.  
Register your product  
By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the  
original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:  
may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;  
may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,  
will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.  
Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration And Test Sheet or, for your  
convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at  
FAQs (frequently asked questions)  
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function  
Center needs. You can download the latest software documents and utilities, read FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips, and learn how to get the most from your Brother product.  
Note  
• You can check here for Brother driver updates.  
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade (for  
Windows® only).  
For Customer Service  
In USA:  
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)  
1-901-379-1215 (fax)  
1-877-BROTHER  
In Canada:  
(514) 685-4898 (fax)  
Service Center Locator (USA only)  
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437).  
Service Center Locations (Canada only)  
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.  
i
       
Ordering accessories and supplies  
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother  
retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover,  
or American Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (You can visit  
us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for  
purchase.)  
Note  
In Canada only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.  
In USA:  
1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)  
1-800-947-1445 (fax)  
In Canada:  
1-877-BROTHER  
Description  
Item  
LC61BK (Prints approx. 450 pages) 1  
LC61C (Prints approx. 325 pages) 1  
LC61M (Prints approx. 325 pages) 1  
LC61Y (Prints approx. 325 pages) 1  
Ink Cartridge Standard <black>  
Ink Cartridge <cyan> (blue)  
Ink Cartridge <magenta> (red)  
Ink Cartridge <yellow>  
Premium Plus Glossy Finish Photo Paper  
(Letter size / 20 sheets)  
(4"×6" size / 20 sheets)  
Matte Finish Inkjet Paper  
(Letter size / 25 sheets)  
Plain Finish Inkjet Paper  
(Letter size / 100 sheets)  
Telephone Line Cord  
BP71GLTR  
BP71GP  
BP60ML (USA only)  
BP60PL100 (USA only)  
LG3077001 (USA only)  
User's Guide  
LX1556001 (English for USA and Canada)  
LX1556002 (French for Canada)  
1
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us at www.brother.com/pageyield.  
ii  
   
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties  
(USA and Canada)  
BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS  
(COLLECTIVELY BROTHER'S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER'S  
LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS  
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF  
ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE  
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS  
ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY  
SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION  
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY  
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR  
LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS  
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER'S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN  
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY  
TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER'S LICENSOR'S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL  
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE  
ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT  
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.  
Compilation and Publication Notice  
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,  
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.  
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without  
notice.  
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials  
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused  
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors  
relating to the publication.  
iii  
 
Brother® One-Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service  
(USA Only)  
Who is covered:  
3 Damage caused by another device or  
software used with this Product (including  
but not limited to damage resulting from  
This limited warranty (“warranty”) is given  
only to the original end-user/retail  
purchaser (referred to in this warranty as  
“Original Purchaser”) of the accompanying  
product, consumables and accessories  
(collectively referred to in this warranty as  
“this Product”).  
If you purchased a product from someone  
other than an authorized Brother reseller in  
the United States or if the product was used  
(including but not limited to floor models or  
refurbished product), prior to your  
purchase you are not the Original  
Purchaser and the product that you  
purchased is not covered by this warranty.  
use of non Brother®-brand parts and  
Consumable and Accessory Items);  
4 Consumable and Accessory Items that  
expired in accordance with a rated life;  
5 Problems arising from other than defects in  
materials or workmanship; and,  
6 Normal Periodic Maintenance Items, such  
as Paper Feeding Kit, Fuser and Laser  
Units.  
This limited warranty is VOID if this Product  
has been altered or modified in any way  
(including but not limited to attempted warranty  
repair without authorization from Brother  
and/or alteration/removal of the serial  
number).  
What is covered:  
This Product includes a Machine and  
Consumable and Accessory Items.  
Consumable and Accessory Items include  
but are not limited to print heads, toner,  
drums, ink cartridges, print cartridges,  
cordless handset battery, refill ribbons,  
therma PLUS paper and thermal paper.  
What to do if you think your Product is  
eligible for warranty service:  
Report your issue to either our Customer  
Service Hotline at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-  
276-8437) or to a Brother Authorized Service  
Center within the applicable warranty  
period. Supply Brother or the Brother  
Authorized Service Center with a copy of your  
dated bill of sale showing that this Product was  
purchased within the U.S. For the name of  
local Brother Authorized Service Center(s),  
call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) or  
Except as otherwise provided herein,  
Brother warrants that the Machine and the  
accompanying  
Consumable  
and  
Accessory Items will be free from defects in  
materials and workmanship, when used  
under normal conditions.  
This warranty applies only to products  
purchased and used in the United States.  
For products purchased in, but used  
outside, the United States, this warranty  
covers only warranty service within the  
United States (and does not include  
shipping outside the United States).  
What Brother will ask you to do:  
After contacting Brother or a Brother  
Authorized Service Center, you may be  
required to deliver (by hand if you prefer) or  
send the Product properly packaged, freight  
prepaid, to the Authorized Service Center  
together with a photocopy of your bill of sale.  
You are responsible for the cost of  
shipping, packing product, and insurance  
(if you desire). You are also responsible for  
loss or damage to this Product in shipping.  
What is the length of the Warranty Periods:  
Machines: one year from the original  
purchase date.  
Accompanying  
Consumable  
and  
Accessory Items: 90 days from the original  
purchase date or the rated life of  
consumable, whichever comes first.  
What Brother will do:  
If the problem reported concerning your  
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable  
and Accessory Items is covered by this  
warranty and if you first reported the problem  
to Brother or an Authorized Service Center  
within the applicable warranty period, Brother  
or its Authorized Service Center will repair or  
replace the Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items at no  
charge to you for parts or labor. The decision  
as to whether to repair or replace the Machine  
and/or accompanying Consumable and  
Accessory Items is made by Brother in its sole  
What is NOT covered:  
This warranty does not cover:  
1 Physical damage to this Product;  
2 Damage caused by improper installation,  
improper or abnormal use, misuse, neglect  
or accident (including but not limited to  
transporting this Product without the proper  
preparation and/or packaging);  
iv  
 
Brother® One-Year Limited Warranty and Replacement Service  
(USA Only)  
discretion. Brother reserves the right to supply  
a refurbished or remanufactured replacement  
Machine and/or accompanying Consumable  
and Accessory Items and use refurbished  
parts provided such replacement products  
conform to the manufacturer’s specifications  
for new product/parts. The repaired or  
replacement Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items will be  
returned to you freight prepaid or made  
available for you to pick up at a conveniently  
located Authorized Service Center.  
If the Machine and/or accompanying  
Consumable and Accessory Items are not  
covered by this warranty (either stage), you  
will be charged for shipping the Machine  
and/or accompanying Consumable and  
Accessory Items back to you and charged for  
any service and/or replacement parts/products  
at Brother’s then current published rates.  
the product; or (iv) the warranty period on your  
original Product has expired or has not been  
sufficiently validated with a copy of the proof of  
purchase (bill of sale). The replacement  
Machine you receive (even if refurbished or  
remanufactured) will be covered by the  
balance of the limited warranty period  
remaining on the original Product, plus an  
additional thirty (30) days. You will keep the  
replacement Machine that is sent to you and  
your original Machine shall become the  
property of Brother. Retain your original  
Accessory Items and a copy of the return  
freight bill, signed by the courier.  
Limitations:  
Brother is not responsible for damage to or  
loss of any equipment, media, programs or  
data related to the use of this Product. Except  
for the repair or replacement as described  
above, Brother shall not be liable for any  
direct, indirect, incidental or consequential  
damages or specific relief. Because some  
states do not allow the exclusion or limitation  
of consequential or incidental damages, the  
above limitation may not apply to you.  
The foregoing are your sole (i.e., only) and  
exclusive remedies under this warranty.  
What happens when Brother elects to  
replace your Machine:  
When a replacement Machine is authorized by  
Brother, and you have delivered the Machine  
to an Authorized Service Center, the  
Authorized Service Center will provide you with  
a replacement Machine after receiving one  
from Brother. If you are dealing directly with  
Brother’s Express Exchange Service Brother  
will send to you a replacement Machine  
shipped for receipt within two business days,  
with the understanding that you will, after  
receipt of the replacement Machine, supply the  
required proof of purchase information,  
together with the Machine that Brother agreed  
to replace. You are then expected to pack the  
Machine that Brother agreed to replace in the  
package from the replacement Machine and  
return it to Brother using the pre-paid freight bill  
supplied by Brother in accordance with the  
instructions provided by Brother. Since you will  
be in possession of two machines, Brother will  
require that you provide a valid major credit  
card number. Brother will issue a hold against  
the credit card account number that you  
provide until Brother receives your original  
Product and determines that your original  
Product is entitled to warranty coverage. Your  
credit card will be charged up to the cost of a  
new Product only if: (i) you do not return your  
original Product to Brother within five (5)  
business days; (ii) the problems with your  
original Product are not covered by the limited  
warranty; (iii) the proper packaging instructions  
are not followed and has caused damage to  
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL  
OTHER WARRANTIES, WRITTEN OR  
ORAL,  
WHETHER  
EXPRESSED  
BY  
AFFIRMATION, PROMISE, DESCRIPTION,  
DRAWING, MODEL OR SAMPLE. ANY AND  
ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THIS  
ONE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY  
DISCLAIMED.  
This Limited Warranty is the only warranty  
that Brother is giving for this Product. It is  
the final expression and the exclusive and  
only statement of Brother’s obligations to  
you. It replaces all other agreements and  
understandings that you may have with  
Brother or its representatives.  
This warranty gives you certain rights and  
you may also have other rights that may  
vary from state to state.  
This Limited Warranty (and Brother’s  
obligation to you) may not be changed in  
any way unless you and Brother sign the  
same piece of paper in which we (1) refer  
to this Product and your bill of sale date, (2)  
describe the change to this warranty and  
(3) agree to make that change.  
Important: We recommend that you keep all  
original packing materials, in the event that  
you ship this Product.  
© 2009 Brother International Corporation  
v
BROTHER MULTIFUNCTION CENTER / FAX MACHINE  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
(Canada only)  
Pursuant to the limited warranty of 1 year from the date of purchase for labour and parts, Brother  
International Corporation (Canada) Ltd. (“Brother”), or its Authorized Service Centres, will repair  
or replace (at Brother's sole discretion) this MFC/Fax machine free of charge if defective in  
material or workmanship. This warranty applies only to products purchased and used in Canada.  
This limited Warranty does not include cleaning, consumables (including, without limitation, ink  
cartridges, print cartridges, print rolls, thermal paper rolls, toner cartridges, drum units, OPC  
belts, fixing units, print heads, paper feed rollers, transfer rolls, cleaning rollers, waste toner  
packs, oil bottles) or damage caused by accident, neglect, misuse or improper installation or  
operation, any damage caused from service, maintenance, modifications, or tampering by  
anyone other than a Brother Authorized Service Representative, or if shipped out of the country.  
The use of supplies or consumable items that are non-Brother products may void your warranty. This limited  
warranty ceases when this machine is rented, sold, or otherwise disposed of.  
Operation of the MFC/Fax machine in excess of the specifications or with the Serial Number or  
Rating Label removed shall be deemed abuse and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability  
of the end-user/purchaser. In order to obtain warranty service, the MFC/Fax machine must be  
delivered or shipped freight prepaid by the end-user/purchaser to a “Brother” Authorized  
Service Centre, together with your Canadian Proof of Purchase in the form of a Sales Receipt.  
When shipping or transporting your MFC/Fax machine, please refer to your Operation  
Manual for the proper packaging procedures.  
For Laser units: Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge (and Toner Drum Unit, waste toner  
packs or oil bottles on applicable models) during shipping or transport will cause severe  
damage to the Laser MFC/Fax machine and will void the Warranty.  
For inkjet units: (When shipping your Inkjet MFC/Fax machine remove the ink cartridges and replace them with  
the original protective parts. If original protective parts are not available, leave ink cartridges installed. Please  
avoid shipping the unit without original protective parts or ink cartridges.) Damage to your print head resulting from  
packing the Inkjet MFC/Fax machine without the ink cartridges or the protective parts will void your warranty.  
Improper packaging may cause severe damage to the machine during shipping and will void the warranty.  
BROTHER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
INCLUDING,  
WITHOUT  
LIMITATIONS,  
ANY  
IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES  
OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT TO THE  
EXTENT THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW CANNOT BE VALIDLY WAIVED.  
No oral or written information, advice or representation provided by Brother, its Authorized  
Service Centres, Distributors, Dealers, Agents or employees, shall create another warranty  
or modify this warranty. The warranty states Brother's entire liability and your exclusive  
remedy against Brother for any failure of the MFC/Fax machine to operate properly.  
Neither Brother nor anyone else involved in the development, production, or delivery of this  
MFC/Fax machine shall be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, consequential, exemplary, or  
punitive damages, including lost profits, arising from the use of or inability to use the product, even  
if advised by the end user/purchaser of the possibility of such damages. Since some Provinces do  
not allow the above limitation of liability, such limitation, may not apply to you.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other  
rights which vary from Province to Province.  
Warranty Service is available at Brother Authorized  
Service Centres throughout Canada.  
For Technical Assistance or for the name and location  
of your nearest Authorized Service Centre call 1-877-BROTHER.  
Internet support: [email protected] or browse Brother's Web Site www.brother.ca.  
vi  
 
Table of Contents  
Accessing Brother Support (Windows®)................................................................5  
vii  
viii  
ix  
x
xi  
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive  
104  
Using PhotoCapture Center® from your computer ......................................104  
PhotoCapture Center® print settings .................................................................112  
xii  
Standard telephone and FCC Notices (These notices are in effect on  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity  
International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement..............................138  
xiii  
PhotoCapture Center®.......................................................................................203  
xiv  
General Information  
1
1
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a  
possible electrical shock.  
Using the  
documentation  
1
Hot Surface icons warn you not to  
touch machine parts that are hot.  
Thank you for buying a Brother machine!  
Reading the documentation will help you  
make the most of your machine.  
Notes tell you how you should  
respond to a situation that may arise  
or give tips about how the current  
operation works with other features.  
Symbols and conventions  
used in the documentation  
1
Accessing the  
The following symbols and conventions are  
used throughout the documentation.  
Software User’s Guide  
and Network User’s  
Guide  
Bold  
Boldtypefaceidentifiesspecific  
keys on the machine’s control  
panel.  
1
This User’s Guide does not contain all the  
information about the machine such as how  
to use the advanced features of the Printer,  
Scanner, PC Fax and Network. When you are  
ready to learn detailed information about  
these operations, read the Software User’s  
Guide and Network User’s Guide that are  
on the CD-ROM.  
Italics  
Italicized typeface emphasizes  
an important point or refers you  
to a related topic.  
Courier Text in Courier New font  
New  
identifies messages on the  
LCD of the machine.  
1
Viewing Documentation  
WARNING  
Warnings tell you what to do to prevent  
possible personal injury.  
Viewing Documentation  
(Windows®)  
1
To view the documentation, from the Start  
menu, point to Brother, MFC-XXXX (where  
XXXX is your model name) from the  
programs group, and then choose  
CAUTION  
Cautions specify procedures you must  
follow or avoid to prevent possible minor  
injuries.  
User’s Guides in HTML format.  
If you have not installed the software, you can  
find the documentation by following the  
instructions below:  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT describes procedures you  
must follow or avoid to prevent possible  
machine problems or damage to other  
objects.  
2
         
General Information  
a Turn on your PC. Insert the Brother  
How to find Scanning instructions  
1
CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
1
Note  
If the Brother screen does not appear  
automatically, go to My Computer  
(Computer), double-click the CD-ROM  
icon, and then double-click start.exe.  
Software User’s Guide  
Scanning  
(Windows® 2000 Professional/  
Windows® XP and Windows Vista®)  
b If the model name screen appears, click  
ControlCenter3  
your model name.  
(Windows® 2000 Professional/  
Windows® XP and Windows Vista®)  
c If the language screen appears, click  
your language. The CD-ROM Top Menu  
will appear.  
Network Scanning  
(Windows® 2000 Professional/  
Windows® XP and Windows Vista®)  
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
How-to-Guides  
The complete ScanSoft™  
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
How-to-Guides can be viewed from the  
Help selection in the ScanSoft™  
PaperPort™ 11SE application.  
d Click Documentation.  
How to find Network setup  
instructions  
1
e Click the documentation you want to  
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
or AOSS™, follow the steps in the Quick  
Setup Guide. For more information about  
network setup please see the Network User's  
Guide.  
read.  
HTML documents:  
Software User’s Guide and  
Network User’s Guide in HTML  
format.  
This format is recommended for  
viewing on your computer.  
PDF documents:  
User’s Guide for stand-alone  
operations, Software User’s Guide  
and Network User’s Guide in PDF  
format.  
This format is recommended for  
printing the manuals. Click to go to  
the Brother Solutions Center, where  
you can view or download the PDF  
documents. (Internet access and  
PDF Reader software are required.)  
3
Chapter 1  
Viewing Documentation  
(Macintosh)  
How to find Scanning instructions  
1
1
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
a Turn on your Macintosh. Insert the  
Brother CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
Software User’s Guide  
drive. The following window will appear.  
Scanning  
(Mac OS X 10.3.9 - 10.5.x)  
ControlCenter2  
(Mac OS X 10.3.9 - 10.5.x)  
Network Scanning  
(Mac OS X 10.3.9 - 10.5.x)  
Presto! PageManager User’s Guide  
The complete Presto! PageManager  
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help  
selection in the Presto! PageManager  
application.  
b Double-click the Documentation icon.  
c Double-click your language folder.  
How to find Network setup  
instructions  
1
d Double-click top.html to view the  
Software User's Guide and Network  
User's Guide in HTML format.  
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
or AOSS™, follow the steps in the Quick  
Setup Guide. For more information about  
network setup please see the Network User's  
Guide.  
e Click the documentation you want to  
read:  
Software User’s Guide  
Network User’s Guide  
4
General Information  
To access the Brother CreativeCenter  
for FREE photo projects and printable  
downloads, click Brother  
Accessing Brother  
Support  
1
(Windows®)  
1
CreativeCenter.  
To return to the Top Menu, click Back or if  
you have finished, click Exit.  
You can find all the contacts you will need,  
such as Web support (Brother Solutions  
Center), Customer Service and Brother  
Authorized Service Centers in Brother  
numbers on page i and on the Brother  
CD-ROM.  
Click Brother Support on the Top Menu.  
The following screen will appear:  
To access our web site  
(http://www.brother.com), click Brother  
Home Page.  
To view all Brother Numbers, including  
Customer Service numbers for the USA  
and Canada, click Support Information.  
To access the USA Brother online  
shopping mall  
additional product and services  
information, click Brother Mall.com.  
To access Canada’s Brother online  
shopping mall (http://www.brother.ca) for  
additional product and services  
information, click Shop Online (Canada).  
For the latest news and product support  
click Brother Solutions Center.  
To visit our web site for original/genuine  
Brother Supplies  
Supplies Information.  
5
 
Chapter 1  
Control panel overview  
1
1
2
4
5
New MSG  
01  
New Fax  
03  
01.01.2010  
01  
03  
06:54  
M e s s a g e  
C e n t e r  
F a x  
MC  
MEN  
S p  
Mem.  
P r e v i e w  
C a l l H i s t o r y  
3
1
On/Off  
4
Dial Pad  
You can turn the machine on or off.  
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax  
numbers and as a keyboard for entering  
information into the machine. This function  
transfers to the touchscreen when you store  
quick dial numbers.  
If you turn the machine off, it will still  
periodically clean the print head. To maintain  
print quality, prolong print head life, and  
provide the best ink cartridge economy, you  
should keep your machine connected to the  
power at all times.  
(Canada only) The # key lets you temporarily  
switch the dialing mode during a telephone call  
from Pulse to Tone.  
2
3
Message Center key  
5
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
Turns the Message Center on or off. It will flash  
when you have new voice messages.  
This is a Touchscreen LCD. You can access  
the menus and options by pressing buttons  
displayed on the screen.  
Fax and telephone keys:  
Redial  
Also, you can adjust the angle of the display by  
lifting it.  
Redials the last 30 numbers called.  
Pause  
Inserts a pause when dialing numbers.  
Hold  
Lets you place telephone calls on hold.  
Speaker Phone  
Turns the speaker phone on or off.  
6
   
General Information  
1
5
6
8
New MSG  
01  
New Fax  
03  
10  
01  
03  
54  
M e s s a g e  
C e n t e r  
F a x  
MC  
MENU  
INK  
P r e v i e w  
t o r y  
S p e e d D i a l  
9
7
6
Mode keys:  
9
Start keys:  
Fax  
Color Start  
Lets you access Fax mode.  
Scan  
Lets you access Scan mode.  
Copy  
Lets you start sending faxes or making  
copies in full color. Also lets you start a  
scanning operation (in color or black &  
white, depending on the scanning setting in  
the ControlCenter software).  
Lets you access Copy mode.  
Black Start  
Photo Capture  
Lets you start sending faxes or making  
copies in black & white. Also lets you start  
a scanning operation (in color or black &  
white depending on the scanning setting in  
the ControlCenter software).  
Lets you access PhotoCapture Center®  
mode.  
7
8
Microphone  
Picks up your voice when you speak to another  
party using Speaker Phone.  
Stop/Exit  
Stops an operation or exits from a menu.  
7
Chapter 1  
9
Ink indicator  
LCD screen  
1
Lets you see the available ink volume.  
Also, lets you access the Inkmenu.  
The LCD shows the current machine status  
when the machine is idle.  
10 Speed Dial  
Lets you search the number you want to  
fax/dial.  
1 2 3 4  
5
6 7 8  
9
11 Warning icon  
New MSG  
New Fax  
03  
01.01..2010  
01  
Appears when there is an error or maintenance  
message; press the Warning icon to view it,  
and then press Stop/Exit to return to the  
Ready screen.  
01  
03  
06:54  
M e s s a g e  
C e n t e r  
F a x  
MC  
MENU  
INK  
Mem.  
P r e v i e w  
C a l l H i s t o r y  
S p e e d D i a l  
12 Message Center  
Lets you listen to and manage voice messages  
and recorded conversations.  
13  
12 11  
10  
13 Call History  
1
Wireless Status  
Lets you view a list of outgoing calls and the  
caller ID history.  
A four level indicator shows the current  
wireless signal strength if you are using a  
wireless connection.  
Also, lets you fax or call the number you have  
chosen from the lists.  
0
Max  
2
3
Memory Status  
Lets you see the available memory in the  
machine.  
Current Receive Mode  
Lets you see the current receive mode.  
Fax(Fax only)  
F/T(Fax/Tel)  
Mnl(Manual)  
MC(Msg Ctr)  
4
5
6
Voice messages in the machine’s memory  
Shows how many received voice messages  
are in the memory.  
New Fax  
When Fax Previewis set to On, you can see  
how many new faxes you have received.  
Faxes in memory  
Shows how many received faxes are in the  
memory.  
7
8
Fax Preview  
Lets you preview received faxes.  
MENU  
Lets you access the main menu.  
8
 
General Information  
f Press 10Mins.  
Basic Operations  
1
G e n e r a l S e t u p  
MENU  
S l e e p M o d e  
To operate the Touchscreen use your finger  
to press the MENUor option button directly on  
the LCD screen. To display and access all the  
screen menus or options in a setting, press  
a b or d c to scroll through them.  
1
1
3
Min  
2
5
Mins  
Mins  
Mins  
10 Mins  
Press  
to return to the previous menu.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT press the Touchscreen with a  
sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It  
may damage the machine.  
The following steps show how to change a  
setting in the machine. In this example the  
Sleep mode setting is changed from 5Mins  
to 10Mins.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
MENU  
G e n e r a l S e t u p  
F a x  
N e t w o r k  
P r i n t R e p o r t s  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Sleep Mode.  
MENU  
G e n e r a l S e t u p  
O f f  
A u t o D a y l i g h t  
L C D S e t t i n g s  
S l e e p M o d e  
5
M i n s  
e Press Sleep Mode.  
9
 
Loading paper and documents  
2
2
c With both hands, gently press and slide  
Loading paper and  
other print media  
the paper side guides (1) and then the  
paper length guide (2) to fit the paper  
size.  
2
Make sure that the triangular marks (3)  
on the paper side guides (1) and paper  
length guide (2) line up with the marks  
for the paper size you are using.  
Note  
To print on Photo (4" × 6") or Photo L  
(3.5" × 5") paper, you must use the photo  
bypass tray. (See Loading photo paper  
1
a If the paper support flap is open, close it,  
and then close the paper support. Pull  
the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
3
2
b Lift the output paper tray cover (1).  
3
1
10  
   
Loading paper and documents  
e Gently put the paper into the paper tray  
print side down and top edge in first.  
Check that the paper is flat in the tray.  
Note  
When you are using Legal size paper,  
press and hold the universal guide release  
button (1) as you slide out the front of the  
paper tray.  
2
1
IMPORTANT  
Be careful that you do not push the paper  
in too far; it may lift at the back of the tray  
and cause feed problems.  
d Fan the stack of paper well to avoid  
paper jams and misfeeds.  
f Gently adjust the paper side guides (1)  
to fit the paper using both hands.  
Make sure the paper side guides touch  
the sides of the paper.  
1
IMPORTANT  
Always make sure that the paper is not  
curled.  
11  
Chapter 2  
g Close the output paper tray cover.  
Loading envelopes and  
postcards  
2
About envelopes  
2
Use envelopes that weigh from 20 to 25 lb  
(80 to 95 g/m2).  
Some envelopes need margin settings to  
be set in the application. Make sure you  
do a test print first before printing many  
envelopes.  
h Slowly push the paper tray completely  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT use any of the following types of  
envelopes, as they will cause paper feed  
problems:  
into the machine.  
• That are of a baggy construction.  
• That are embossed (have raised  
writing on them).  
• That have clasps or staples.  
• That are pre-printed on the inside.  
Glue  
Double flap  
i While holding the paper tray in place,  
pull out the paper support ( ) until it  
clicks, and then unfold the paper  
support flap ( ).  
Occasionally you may experience paper  
feed problems caused by the thickness,  
size and flap shape of the envelopes you  
are using.  
2
1
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT use the paper support flap for  
Legal size paper.  
12  
 
Loading paper and documents  
b Put envelopes or postcards in the paper  
tray with the address side down and the  
leading edge in first as shown in the  
illustration. With both hands, gently  
press and slide the paper side  
guides (1) and paper length guide (2) to  
fit the size of the envelopes or  
Loading envelopes and postcards  
2
a Before loading, press the corners and  
sides of envelopes or postcards to make  
them as flat as possible.  
2
IMPORTANT  
If envelopes or postcards are ‘double-  
feeding’, put one envelope or postcard in  
the paper tray at a time.  
postcards.  
1
2
13  
 
Chapter 2  
If you have problems when printing on  
envelopes with the flap on the short edge,  
try the following:  
a Squeeze the blue photo bypass tray  
release button (1) using your right index  
finger and thumb and push the photo  
bypass tray forward until it clicks into the  
photo printing position (2).  
2
a Open the envelope flap.  
b Put the envelope into the paper tray with  
the address side down and the flap  
positioned as shown in the illustration.  
1
2
Photo Bypass Tray  
c Adjust the size and margin in your  
application.  
b Press and slide the paper side  
guides (1) and paper length guide (2) to  
fit the paper size.  
Loading photo paper  
2
Note  
1
In Canada, the photo bypass tray is  
called the photo paper tray.  
Use the photo bypass tray, which is located  
on the top of the output paper tray cover, to  
print on Photo (4" × 6") and Photo L  
(3.5" × 5") size paper. When you use the  
photo bypass tray, you do not have to take  
out the paper that is in the tray beneath it. You  
can load maximum of 20 photo cards in the  
tray. (For the maximum number of photo  
cards you can load, see Paper weight,  
2
c Put the photo paper into the photo  
bypass tray and gently adjust the paper  
side guides to the paper.  
Make sure the paper side guides touch  
the sides of the paper. Check that the  
paper is flat in the tray.  
14  
   
Loading paper and documents  
Removing small printouts  
from the machine  
Note  
2
• Be careful that you do not push the paper  
in too far; it may lift at the back of the tray  
and cause feed problems.  
When the machine ejects small paper onto  
the output paper tray cover you may not be  
able to reach it. Make sure printing has  
finished, and then pull the tray completely out  
of the machine.  
• Always make sure that the paper is not  
curled or wrinkled.  
2
d When you have finished printing photos  
return the photo bypass tray to the  
normal printing position.  
Squeeze the blue photo bypass tray  
release button (1) using your right index  
finger and thumb and pull the photo  
bypass tray back until it clicks (2).  
1
2
IMPORTANT  
If you do not return the photo bypass tray  
to the normal position after printing  
photos, you will get a No Paper Fed  
error when you use cut sheet paper.  
Photo Bypass Tray Photo Bypass Tray  
in the Normal  
in the Photo  
printing position  
printing position  
15  
   
Chapter 2  
Printable area  
2
The printable area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The figures below  
show the unprintable areas on cut sheet paper and envelopes. The machine can print in the  
shaded areas of cut sheet paper only when the Borderless print feature is available and turned  
on. (See Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s Guide  
on the CD-ROM.)  
Cut Sheet Paper  
Envelopes  
3
4
3
1
4
1
2
2
Top (1)  
Bottom (2)  
Left (3)  
Right (4)  
Cut Sheet  
Envelopes  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.47 in. (12 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.95 in. (24 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
0.12 in. (3 mm)  
Note  
The Borderless feature is not available for envelopes.  
16  
 
Loading paper and documents  
Recommended print media  
2
Acceptable paper and  
other print media  
2
To get the best print quality, we suggest using  
Brother paper. (See the table below.)  
The print quality can be affected by the type  
of paper you use in the machine.  
We recommend using ‘3M Transparency  
Film’ when you print on transparencies.  
2
To get the best print quality for the settings  
you have chosen, always set the Paper Type  
to match the type of paper you load.  
Brother paper  
Paper Type  
Item  
You can use plain paper, inkjet paper (coated  
paper), glossy paper, transparencies and  
envelopes.  
Letter Plain  
BP60PL100  
(USA only)  
Letter Glossy Photo  
Letter Inkjet (Matte)  
4 × 6 in. Glossy Photo  
BP71GLTR  
We recommend testing various paper types  
before buying large quantities.  
BP60ML (USA only)  
BP71GP  
For best results, use Brother paper.  
When you print on inkjet paper (coated  
paper), transparencies and photo paper,  
be sure to choose the proper media in the  
Basic’ tab of the printer driver or in the  
Paper Type setting of the machine’s  
menu. (See Paper Type on page 24.)  
When you print on Brother Photo paper,  
load one extra sheet of the same photo  
paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has  
been included in the paper package for  
this purpose.  
When you use transparencies or photo  
paper, remove each sheet at once to  
prevent smudging or paper jams.  
Avoid touching the printed surface of the  
paper immediately after printing; the  
surface may not be completely dry and  
may stain your fingers.  
17  
   
Chapter 2  
Paper capacity of the output paper  
tray cover  
Handling and using print  
media  
2
2
Up to 50 sheets of Letter, Legal or A4 20 lb  
(80 g/m2) paper.  
Store paper in its original packaging, and  
keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and  
away from moisture, direct sunlight and  
heat.  
Transparencies and photo paper must be  
picked up from the output paper tray cover  
one page at a time to avoid smudging.  
Avoid touching the shiny (coated) side of  
photo paper. Load photo paper with the  
shiny side facing down.  
Avoid touching either side of  
transparencies because they absorb  
water and perspiration easily, and this  
may cause decreased output quality.  
Transparencies designed for laser  
printers/copiers may stain your next  
document. Use only transparencies  
recommended for inkjet printing.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT use the following kinds of paper:  
• Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or  
irregularly shaped paper  
1
1
1
0.08 in. (2 mm) or greater curl may  
cause jams to occur.  
• Extremely shiny or highly textured  
paper  
• Paper that cannot be arranged  
uniformly when stacked  
• Paper made with a short grain  
18  
 
Loading paper and documents  
Choosing the right print media  
2
Paper type and size for each operation  
2
2
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Usage  
Fax  
Copy  
Photo  
Printer  
Capture  
Cut Sheet  
Letter  
A4  
8 1/2 × 11 in. (215.9 × 279.4 mm) Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
8.3 × 11.7 in. (210 × 297 mm)  
Yes  
Legal  
Executive  
JIS B5  
A5  
8 1/2 × 14 in. (215.9 × 355.6 mm) Yes  
7 1/4 × 10 1/2 in. (184 × 267 mm) –  
7.2 × 10.1 in. (182 × 257 mm)  
5.8 × 8.3 in. (148 × 210 mm)  
4.1 × 5.8 in. (105 × 148 mm)  
4 × 6 in. (10 × 15 cm)  
Yes  
A6  
Cards  
Photo  
Photo L  
Photo 2L  
Yes  
Yes  
3 1/2 × 5 in. (89 × 127 mm)  
5 × 7 in. (13 × 18 cm)  
Yes  
Index Card 5 × 8 in. (127 × 203 mm)  
Postcard 1 3.9 × 5.8 in. (100 × 148 mm)  
Postcard 2 5.8 × 7.9 in. (148 × 200 mm)  
(Double)  
Envelopes  
C5  
Envelope  
6.4 × 9 in. (162 × 229 mm)  
4.3 × 8.7 in. (110 × 220 mm)  
Yes  
Yes  
DL  
Envelope  
COM-10  
Monarch  
4 1/8 × 9 1/2 in. (105 × 241 mm)  
3 7/8 × 7 1/2 in. (98 × 191 mm)  
4.1 × 9.3 in. (105 × 235 mm)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
JE4  
Envelope  
Transparencies Letter  
8 1/2 × 11 in. (215.9 × 279.4 mm) –  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
A4  
8.3 × 11.7 in. (210 × 297 mm)  
5.8 × 8.3 in. (148 × 210 mm)  
A5  
Legal  
8 1/2 × 14 in. (215.9 × 355.6 mm) –  
19  
       
Chapter 2  
Paper weight, thickness and capacity  
2
Paper Type  
Weight  
Thickness  
No. of  
sheets  
17 to 32 lb (64 to 120 g/m2)  
17 to 53 lb (64 to 200 g/m2)  
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m2)  
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m2)  
Up to 32 lb (Up to 120 g/m2)  
Up to 53 lb (Up to 200 g/m2)  
100 1  
20  
Cut  
Sheet  
Plain Paper  
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)  
3 to 10 mil (0.08 to 0.25 mm)  
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)  
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)  
Up to 6 mil (Up to 0.15 mm)  
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)  
Up to 20 mil (Up to 0.52 mm)  
Inkjet Paper  
Glossy Paper  
30  
Cards Photo 4"×6"  
Index Card  
Postcard  
30  
10  
10  
20 to 25 lb (75 to 95 g/m2)  
Envelopes  
Transparencies  
1
2
Up to 100 sheets of plain paper 20 lb (80 g/m2).  
For Photo 4"×6" paper and Photo L 3.5"×5" paper, use the photo bypass tray (in USA) or the photo paper tray (in  
3
BP71 69 lb (260 g/m2) paper is especially designed for Brother inkjet machines.  
20  
           
Loading paper and documents  
Make sure documents with ink or liquid  
correction fluid are completely dry.  
Loading documents  
2
You can send a fax, make copies, and scan  
from the ADF (automatic document feeder)  
and from the scanner glass.  
a Unfold the ADF Document Output  
Support Flap (1).  
2
b Fan the pages well.  
Using the ADF  
2
c Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of  
your document.  
The ADF can hold up to 15 pages and feeds  
each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb  
(80 g/m2) paper and always fan the pages  
before putting them in the ADF.  
d Make sure you place your document,  
face down, top edge first in the ADF  
underneath the guides (2) until you feel  
it touch the feed rollers and the LCD  
screen shows ADF Ready.  
Recommended environment  
2
Temperature:  
Humidity:  
Paper:  
68 to 86 °F (20 to 30 °C)  
2
50% to 70%  
20 lb LTR (80 g/m2 A4)  
1
Document Sizes Supported  
2
Length:  
Width:  
5.8 to 14 in. (148 to 355.6 mm)  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT leave a thick document on the  
scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may  
jam.  
5.8 to 8.5 in.  
(148 to 215.9 mm)  
17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2)  
Weight:  
How to load documents  
2
Using the scanner glass  
2
IMPORTANT  
• DO NOT pull on the document while it is  
feeding.  
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or  
scan pages of a book or one page at a time.  
• DO NOT use paper that is curled,  
wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper  
clipped, pasted or taped.  
Document Sizes Supported  
2
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or  
fabric.  
Length:  
Width:  
Up to 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Up to 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg)  
Weight:  
21  
     
Chapter 2  
How to load documents  
Note  
2
Scannable area  
2
The scannable area depends on the settings  
in the application you are using. The figures  
below show unscannable areas.  
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must  
be empty.  
3
4
a Lift the document cover.  
1
b Using the document guidelines on the  
left and top, place the document face  
down in the upper left corner of the  
scanner glass.  
2
Usage Document Top (1)  
Size  
Left (3)  
Bottom (2) Right (4)  
Fax  
Letter  
A4  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.16 in.  
(4 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.04 in.  
(1 mm)  
Legal  
Letter  
A4  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.16 in.  
(4 mm)  
Copy  
Scan  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
Letter  
A4  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
0.12 in.  
(3 mm)  
c Close the document cover.  
IMPORTANT  
If you are scanning a book or thick  
document, DO NOT slam the cover down  
or press on it.  
22  
   
General setup  
3
3
On/Off key  
3
Mode Timer  
3
You can turn the machine on and off by  
pressing the On/Off key.  
The machine has four temporary mode keys  
on the control panel: Fax, Scan, Copy and  
Photo Capture. You can change the amount  
of time the machine takes after the last Scan,  
Copy or PhotoCapture operation before it  
returns to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the  
machine stays in the mode you used last.  
3
Note  
If you have connected an external  
telephone or TAD, it is always available.  
Turning the machine off  
3
a Press and hold down the On/Off key  
until the LCD shows Shutting Down.  
The LCD will stay on for a few seconds  
before going off. You cannot use the  
handset when the machine is off.  
a Press MENU.  
Turning the machine on  
3
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
a Press the On/Off key.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Mode Timer.  
e Press Mode Timer.  
f Press 0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,  
2 Mins, 5 Minsor Off.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
23  
         
Chapter 3  
Paper Size  
3
Paper settings  
3
You can use five sizes of paper for copies:  
Letter, Legal, A4, A5 and 4 × 6 in.  
Paper Type  
3
(10 × 15 cm) and three sizes for printing  
faxes: Letter, Legal and A4. When you  
change the size of paper you load in the  
machine, you will need to change the paper  
size setting at the same time so your machine  
can fit an incoming fax on the page.  
To get the best print quality, set the machine  
for the type of paper you are using.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
a Press MENU.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Paper Type.  
e Press Paper Type.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Paper Size.  
e Press Paper Size.  
f Press Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,  
Brother BP71, Other Glossyor  
Transparency.  
f Press Letter, Legal, A4, A5or  
4"x6".  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
The machine ejects paper with printed  
surfaces face up onto the paper tray in  
front of the machine. When you use  
transparencies or glossy paper, remove  
each sheet at once to prevent smudging  
or paper jams.  
24  
     
General setup  
Beeper Volume  
3
Volume Settings  
3
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep  
when you press a key, make a mistake or  
after you send or receive a fax.  
Ring Volume  
3
You can choose a range of ring volume  
levels, from Highto Off.  
You can choose a range of volume levels,  
from Highto Off.  
The machine will keep the new setting until  
you change it.  
3
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
Setting the Ring Volume from the  
menu  
3
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Volume.  
e Press Volume.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Volume.  
e Press Volume.  
f Press a or b to display Beeper.  
g Press Beeper.  
h Press Low, Med, Highor Off.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
f Press a or b to display Ring.  
g Press Ring.  
h Press Low, Med, Highor Off.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
25  
     
Chapter 3  
Speaker Volume  
3
Handset Volume  
3
You can choose a range of speaker volume  
levels, from Highto Off.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Volume.  
e Press Volume.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Volume.  
e Press Volume.  
f Press a or b to display Handset.  
g Press Handset.  
f Press a or b to display Speaker.  
g Press Speaker.  
h Press Lowor High.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
h Press Low, Med, Highor Off.  
Note  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
You can adjust the handset volume any  
time you are talking on the telephone.  
There are two handset volume levels, Low  
and High. The default setting is Low.  
You can also adjust the speaker volume by  
pressing Speaker Phone.  
a Press Speaker Phone.  
Press  
or  
to adjust the volume  
b Press d or c to display Volume.  
c Press Volume.  
level. The LCD shows the setting you are  
choosing. The new setting will remain until  
you change it again.  
d Press  
or  
.
This setting will stay until you change it  
again.  
e Press Speaker Phone.  
Note  
• You can adjust the speaker volume while  
you are listening to your outgoing  
message (OGM) and incoming messages  
(ICM’s) by pressing  
or  
.
• If you turn Incoming Recording Monitor to  
OFF the Speaker for screening calls will  
be disabled and you won’t hear callers  
leaving messages. The volume for other  
operations can still be controlled using  
or  
.
26  
   
General setup  
Choosing the Handset  
Volume (for Volume Amplify)  
WARNING  
3
It is important that you DO NOT choose  
Permanent unless ALL the users are  
hearing-impaired. Otherwise, the default  
setting of Amplifymay damage the  
hearing of some users.  
Before you begin to use the machine, you  
must decide if you need to set the handset  
volume to Volume Amplify: Onfor a user  
who is hearing-impaired. The amplify volume  
level complies with FCC standards.  
3
Volume Amplify: Off  
This default setting is appropriate if none of  
the users are hearing-impaired. During a  
Setting Volume Amplify  
3
Please carefully read Choosing the Handset  
conversation, users can press  
or  
on the LCD to adjust the volume to Lowor  
High. When the handset is replaced, the  
handset volume will remain until you change  
it again.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
Volume Amplify: On-Temporary  
This setting is appropriate if some of the  
users are hearing-impaired. During a  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Volume.  
e Press Volume.  
conversation, users can press  
or  
on the LCD to adjust the volume to Low, High  
or Amplify. When the handset is replaced,  
the handset volume returns to the default  
setting of Low.  
f Press a or b to display  
Volume Amplify.  
Volume Amplify: On-Permanent  
g Press Volume Amplify.  
h Do one of the following:  
Choose Volume Amplify: On-Permanent  
if all of the users are hearing-impaired. During  
a conversation, users can press  
or  
If none of the users are hearing-  
impaired, press Off. Go to step j.  
on the LCD to adjust the volume to Low,  
Highor Amplify. When the handset is  
replaced, the handset volume returns to the  
default setting of Amplify.  
If some or all of the users are  
hearing-impaired, press On.  
i Do one of the following:  
Note  
If all the users are hearing-impaired,  
press Permanent.  
When you press  
or  
on the  
control panel to adjust the volume, the  
LCD shows the setting you are choosing.  
Each key press changes the volume to the  
next setting.  
If only some of the users are hearing-  
impaired, press Temporary.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
27  
       
Chapter 3  
Automatic Daylight  
Saving Time  
Sleep Mode  
3
3
You can choose how long the machine must  
be idle (from 1 to 60 minutes) before it goes  
into sleep mode. The timer will restart if any  
operation is carried out on the machine.  
You can set the machine to change  
automatically for daylight saving time. It will  
reset itself forward one hour in the Spring and  
backward one hour in the Fall. Make sure you  
have set the correct date and time in the  
Date&Timesetting.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
The factory setting is Off, so you will have to  
turn on Automatic Daylight Saving Time as  
follows.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Sleep Mode.  
e Press Sleep Mode.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
f Press 1 Min, 2 Mins, 3 Mins,  
5 Mins, 10 Mins, 30 Minsor  
60 Mins.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display  
Auto Daylight.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
e Press Auto Daylight.  
f Press On(or Off).  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
28  
   
General setup  
LCD screen  
3
Setting the backlight  
brightness  
3
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD  
backlight. If you are having difficulty reading  
the LCD, try changing the brightness setting.  
3
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display LCD Settings.  
e Press LCD Settings.  
f Press Backlight.  
g Press Light, Medor Dark.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
Setting the Dim Timer for the  
backlight  
3
You can set how long the LCD backlight stays  
on after you go back to the Ready screen.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
General Setup.  
c Press General Setup.  
d Press a or b to display LCD Settings.  
e Press LCD Settings.  
f Press Dim Timer.  
g Press 10 Secs, 20 Secs, 30 Secsor  
Off.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
29  
     
Security features  
4
4
Setting and changing the  
memory security password  
Memory Security  
4
4
Memory Security lets you prevent  
unauthorized access to the machine. You will  
not be able to continue to schedule Delayed  
Faxes or Polling jobs. However, any  
pre-scheduled Delayed Faxes will be sent  
even if you turn on Memory Security, so they  
will not be lost.  
Note  
If you have already set the password, you  
will not need to set it again.  
Setting a password for the first time  
a Press MENU.  
4
While Memory Security is On, the following  
operations are available:  
Receiving faxes into memory (limited by  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
memory capacity)  
Fax Forwarding (if Fax Forwarding was  
already On)  
d Press a or b to display  
Miscellaneous.  
Paging (if Paging was already On)  
Remote Retrieval (if Fax Storage was  
e Press Miscellaneous.  
f Press Mem Security.  
already On)  
While Memory Security is On, the following  
operations are NOT available:  
g Enter a 4-digit number for the password  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
Printing received faxes  
Sending faxes  
Copying  
h When the LCD shows Verify:,  
re-enter the password.  
Press OK.  
PC printing  
Scanning  
PhotoCapture  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
PC Fax Receive  
Operation from control panel  
Note  
• To print the faxes in memory, turn off  
Memory Security.  
• You must turn off PC Fax Receive before  
you can turn on Memory Security.  
• If you forget the Memory Security  
password, please call Brother Customer  
Service.  
30  
     
Security features  
Changing your memory security  
password  
Turning the memory security  
on/off  
4
4
a Press MENU.  
Turning on the memory security lock  
a Press MENU.  
4
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Miscellaneous.  
4
e Press Miscellaneous.  
f Press Mem Security.  
g Press Set Password.  
d Press a or b to display  
Miscellaneous.  
e Press Miscellaneous.  
f Press Mem Security.  
g Press Set Security.  
h Enter the registered 4-digit number for  
the current password using the buttons  
on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
h Enter the registered 4-digit password  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
i Enter a 4-digit number for a new  
password using the buttons on the LCD.  
The machine goes offline and the LCD  
shows Memory Security.  
Press OK.  
j When the LCD shows Verify:,  
re-enter the new password using the  
buttons on the LCD.  
Note  
If there is a power failure the data will stay  
in memory for approximately 24 hours.  
Press OK.  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
Turning off the memory security  
4
a Press Unlock.  
b Enter the registered 4-digit password  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
Memory Security is automatically turned  
off.  
Note  
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD  
shows Wrong Passwordand stays  
offline. The machine will stay in Secure  
mode until the registered password is  
entered.  
31  
   
Chapter 4  
32  
Sending a Fax  
5
5
Faxing from the ADF  
5
Entering Fax mode  
5
When the machine is idle, the time appears  
on the LCD. When you want to send a fax, or  
change fax send or receive settings, press  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Place the document face down in the  
the  
(Fax) key to illuminate it in blue.  
c Enter the fax number using the dial pad.  
You can also enter the fax number by  
pressing Speed Dial. Press the  
number or name you want and then  
press Send a fax.  
(For details, see How to Dial  
Note  
The LCD shows:  
You can preview a fax message before  
sending it by setting Previewto On.  
For details, see How to preview an  
FAX/TEL  
F a x R e s o l u t i o n  
S t a n d a r d  
C o n t r a s t  
A u t o  
B r o a d c a s t i n g  
O f f  
C a l l H i s t
o r y  
S p e e d D i a l  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Press d or c to scroll through the Fax key  
options. Some functions are only available  
when sending black & white faxes.  
Note  
• To cancel, press Stop/Exit.  
Fax Resolution(See page 39.)  
Contrast(See page 39.)  
• If you send a black & white fax when the  
memory is full it will be sent in real time.  
Broadcasting(See page 37.)  
Preview(See page 36.)  
Delayed Fax(See page 41.)  
Batch TX(See page 41.)  
Real Time TX(See page 40.)  
Polled TX(See page 92.)  
Polling RX(See page 90.)  
Overseas Mode(See page 41.)  
Glass ScanSize(See page 35.)  
Set New Default(See page 42.)  
Factory Reset(See page 42.)  
Press the option you want.  
34  
     
Sending a Fax  
e When the LCD asks you Next Page?,  
Faxing from the scanner glass  
5
do one of the following:  
You can use the scanner glass to fax pages  
of a book one at a time. The document can be  
up to Letter or A4 size.  
To send a single page, press No(or  
press Black Start again).  
The machine starts sending the  
document.  
To send color faxes with multiple pages use  
the ADF.  
To send more than one page, press  
Yesand go to step f.  
Note  
Since you can only scan one page at a  
time, it is easier to use the ADF if you are  
sending a multiple page document.  
f Place the next page on the scanner  
glass.  
Press Black Start or Color Start.  
The machine starts scanning the page.  
(Repeat steps e and f for each  
additional page.)  
5
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Place your document face down on the  
scanner glass. (See Using the scanner  
Faxing A4 size documents  
from the scanner glass  
5
c Enter the fax number using the dial pad  
or Speed Dial.  
When documents are A4 size, you need to  
set Glass ScanSizeto A4. If you do not,  
the bottom portion of the faxes will be  
missing.  
Note  
You can preview a fax message before  
sending it if you have set Previewto On.  
For details, see How to preview an  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press d or c to display  
Glass ScanSize.  
c Press Glass ScanSize.  
d Press A4.  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
If you press Black Start, the  
machine starts scanning the first  
page. Go to step e.  
Note  
If you press Color Start, the  
machine starts sending the  
document.  
You can save the setting you use most  
often by setting it as default. (See Setting  
Color fax transmission  
5
Your machine can send a color fax to  
machines that support this feature.  
Color faxes cannot be stored in the machine’s  
memory. When you send a color fax, the  
machine will send it in real time (even if  
Real Time TXis set to Off).  
35  
           
Chapter 5  
How to preview an outgoing  
fax (Black & White only)  
Button  
Description  
5
Enlarge the fax.  
You can preview a fax message before you  
send it. You must set the Real Time  
Transmission and Polling RX to off before  
you use this feature. (See Real Time  
Reduce the fax.  
Scroll vertically.  
or  
Scroll horizontally.  
or  
Note  
Rotate the fax clockwise.  
Go back to the previous page.  
Go to the next page.  
To send a color fax do not use Preview.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press d or c to display Preview.  
c Press Preview.  
Close the preview table.  
h Press Black Start.  
d Press On.  
Note  
e Load the document.  
The fax message in the memory will be  
sent and then erased when you press  
Black Start.  
f Enter the fax number using the dial pad.  
You can also enter the fax number by  
pressing Speed Dial. Then, press  
a or b to display the number you want,  
press the number to choose it, and then  
press Send a fax.  
Canceling a fax in progress  
5
If you want to cancel a fax while the machine  
is scanning, dialing or sending, press  
Stop/Exit.  
g Press Black Start.  
The machine starts scanning the  
document and the outgoing fax appears  
on the LCD.  
When the fax is displayed, press MENU  
and the following buttons will appear on  
the LCD. Press the button you want to  
use to perform an operation.  
36  
     
Sending a Fax  
Broadcasting  
(Black & White only)  
Note  
• If you did not use up any of the numbers  
for Groups, you can ‘broadcast’ faxes to  
as many as 250 different numbers.  
5
Broadcasting is when the same fax message  
is automatically sent to more than one fax  
number. You can include Groups, Speed Dial  
numbers and up to 50 manually dialed  
numbers in the same broadcast.  
• The machine’s available memory will vary  
depending on the types of jobs in the  
memory and the number of locations used  
for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the  
maximum numbers available, you will not  
be able to use dual access and delayed  
fax.  
After the broadcast is finished, a Broadcast  
Report will be printed.  
• If the Out of Memorymessage  
appears, press Stop/Exit to stop the job.  
If more than one page has been scanned,  
press Black Start to send the portion that  
is in the machine’s memory.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
5
b Load your document.  
c Press d or c to display Broadcasting.  
d Press Broadcasting.  
e You can add numbers to the broadcast  
in the following ways:  
Press Add Numberand enter a  
number using the buttons on the  
LCD.  
Press OK.  
#
01  
Press Speed Dial. Press  
search by Alphabetical Order or  
to  
Numerical Order. Press the locations  
where you want to send a fax.  
Press OK.  
f After you have entered all the fax  
numbers by repeating step e, press OK.  
g Press Black Start.  
37  
     
Chapter 5  
Canceling a Broadcast in  
progress  
Additional sending  
operations  
5
5
a Press Stop/Exit.  
Sending faxes using multiple  
settings  
b Do one of the following:  
5
To cancel the entire broadcast, press  
When you send a fax you can choose any  
combination of these settings: resolution,  
contrast, scan size, overseas mode, delayed  
fax timer, polling transmission and real time  
transmission.  
Entire Broadcast. Go to step c.  
To cancel the current job, press the  
button that displays the number  
being dialed. Go to step d.  
To exit without canceling, press  
Stop/Exit.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
c When the LCD asks if you want to  
cancel the entire broadcast, do one of  
the following:  
b Press d or c to display a setting you  
want to change and press the setting,  
then press the option you want.  
Press Yesto confirm.  
c Repeat step b to change more settings.  
To exit without canceling, press No  
or Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• Most settings are temporary and the  
machine returns to its default settingsafter  
you send a fax.  
d Do one of the following:  
To cancel the current job, press Yes.  
To exit without canceling, press No  
or Stop/Exit.  
• You can save some of the settings you  
use most often by setting them as default.  
These settings will stay until you change  
38  
           
Sending a Fax  
Contrast  
5
Changing fax resolution  
5
If your document is very light or very dark, you  
may want to change the contrast. For most  
documents the factory setting Autocan be  
used. It automatically chooses a suitable  
contrast for your document.  
The quality of a fax can be improved by  
changing the fax resolution.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
Use Lightwhen sending a light document.  
Use Darkwhen sending a dark document.  
b Press d or c to display  
Fax Resolution.  
c Press Fax Resolution.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
d Press the resolution you want.  
b Press d or c to display Contrast.  
c Press Contrast.  
5
Note  
You can choose four different resolution  
settings for black & white faxes and two for  
color faxes.  
d Press Auto, Lightor Dark.  
Note  
Even if you choose Lightor Dark, the  
machine will send the fax using the Auto  
setting in any of the following conditions:  
Black & White  
Standard  
Suitable for most typed  
documents.  
• When you send a color fax.  
Fine  
Good for small print and  
transmits a little slower than  
Standard resolution.  
• When you choose Photoas the Fax  
Resolution.  
S.Fine  
Photo  
Good for small print or artwork  
and transmits slower than Fine  
resolution.  
Use when the document has  
varying shades of gray or is a  
photograph. This has the  
slowest transmission.  
Color  
Standard  
Suitable for most typed  
documents.  
Fine  
Use when the document is a  
photograph. The transmission  
time is slower than Standard  
resolution.  
If you choose S.Fineor Photoand then  
use the Color Start key to send a fax, the  
machine will send the fax using the Fine  
setting.  
39  
       
Chapter 5  
Dual Access  
(Black & White only)  
Note  
5
• If the memory is full and you are sending a  
black and white fax from the ADF, the  
machine will send the document in real  
time (even if Real Time TXis set to  
Off). Faxes from the scanner glass  
cannot be sent until you clear some of the  
memory.  
You can dial a number and start scanning the  
fax into memory—even when the machine is  
sending from memory, receiving faxes or  
printing PC data. The LCD shows the new job  
number and available memory.  
The number of pages you can scan into the  
memory will vary depending on the data that  
is printed on them.  
• In real time transmission, the automatic  
redial feature does not work when you are  
using the scanner glass.  
Note  
If the Out of Memorymessage appears  
while scanning a document, press  
Stop/Exit to cancel or Black Start to send  
the scanned pages.  
Real Time Transmission  
5
When you are sending a fax, the machine will  
scan the document into the memory before  
sending. Then, as soon as the telephone line  
is free, the machine will start dialing and  
sending it.  
Sometimes, you may want to send an  
important document immediately, without  
waiting for memory transmission. You can  
turn on Real Time TX.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press d or c to display Real Time TX.  
c Press Real Time TX.  
d Press On.  
40  
     
Sending a Fax  
Overseas Mode  
5
Delayed Batch Transmission  
(Black & White only)  
5
If you are having difficulty sending a fax  
overseas due to possible interference on the  
telephone line, we recommend that you turn  
on the Overseas mode. After you send a fax  
using this feature, the feature will turn itself  
off.  
Before sending the delayed faxes, your  
machine will help you economize by sorting  
all the faxes in the memory by destination and  
scheduled time. All delayed faxes that are  
scheduled to be sent at the same time to the  
same fax number will be sent as one fax to  
save transmission time.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load your document.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
c Press d or c to display  
Overseas Mode.  
5
b Press d or c to display Batch TX.  
c Press Batch TX.  
d Press On.  
d Press Overseas Mode.  
e Press On(or Off).  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Delayed Faxing  
(Black & White only)  
5
Checking and canceling  
waiting jobs  
5
During the day you can store up to 50 faxes  
in the memory to be sent within 24-hours.  
These faxes will be sent at the time of day you  
enter in step f.  
You can check which jobs are still waiting in  
the memory to be sent and cancel a job.  
(If there are no jobs, the LCD shows  
No Jobs Waiting.)  
a Press  
(Fax).  
a Press MENU.  
b Load your document.  
c Press d or c to display Delayed Fax.  
d Press Delayed Fax.  
e Press On.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Remaining Jobs.  
e Press Remaining Jobs.  
f Enter the time you want the fax to be  
sent (in 24-hour format) using the  
buttons on the LCD.  
Any waiting jobs appear on the LCD.  
f Press a or b to scroll through the jobs  
and choose the job you want to cancel.  
Press OK.  
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)  
Press OK.  
Note  
The number of pages you can scan into  
the memory depends on the amount of  
data that is printed on each page.  
41  
                 
Chapter 5  
g Do one of the following:  
To cancel, press Yes.  
Restoring all fax settings to  
the factory settings  
5
If you want to cancel another job go  
to step f.  
You can restore all the fax settings you have  
changed to the factory settings. These  
settings will stay until you change them again.  
To exit without canceling, press No.  
h When you have finished, press  
Stop/Exit.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press d or c to display  
Factory Reset.  
Setting your changes as the  
new default  
5
c Press Factory Reset.  
d Press Yes.  
You can save the fax settings for  
Fax Resolution, Contrast,  
Real Time TX, Glass ScanSizeand  
Preview you use most often by setting them  
as default. These settings will stay until you  
change them again.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Sending a fax manually  
5
Manual transmission lets you hear the  
dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while  
sending a fax.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press d or c to choose the setting you  
want to change, and then press the new  
option.  
Note  
If you are sending a multiple page fax, use  
the ADF.  
Repeat this step for each setting you  
want to change.  
c After changing the last setting, press  
d or c to display Set New Default.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load your document.  
d Press Set New Default.  
e Press Yes.  
c To listen for a dial tone, press  
Speaker Phone on the machine or pick  
up the handset.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
d Dial the fax number using the dial pad.  
You can also enter the fax number on  
the LCD by pressing Speed Dialand  
Send a fax. (For details, see How to  
e When you hear the fax tone, press  
Black Start or Color Start.  
If you are sending from the scanner  
glass, press Sendon the LCD to send  
the fax.  
f If you pick up the handset, replace it.  
42  
         
Sending a Fax  
Sending a fax at the end of a  
conversation  
5
At the end of a conversation you can send a  
fax to the other party before you both hang  
up.  
a Ask the other party to wait for fax tones  
(beeps) and then to press the Start or  
Send key before hanging up.  
b Load your document.  
c Press Black Start or Color Start.  
5
If you are using the scanner glass,  
press Sendto send the fax.  
d Replace the handset.  
Out of Memory message  
5
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while scanning the first page of a fax, press  
Stop/Exit to cancel the fax.  
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while scanning a subsequent page, you will  
have the option to press Black Start or  
Color Start to send the pages scanned so  
far, or to press Stop/Exit to cancel the  
operation.  
Note  
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while faxing and you do not want to delete  
your stored faxes to clear the memory,  
you can send the fax in real time. (See  
43  
   
Receiving a Fax  
6
6
Receive Modes  
6
Choose the correct Receive Mode  
6
The correct Receive mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber  
services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the  
Brother machine.  
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?  
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring” but different telephone companies may have other names for this  
service such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,  
Data Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. (See Distinctive Ring  
on page 63 for instruction on setting up your machine using this feature.)  
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?  
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility  
that Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.  
(See Voice Mail on page 62 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.)  
Will you be using the Built-in Message Center?  
Your Brother machine has a built-in digital Message Center that allows you to store incoming voice or fax  
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother  
machine?  
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are  
stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose Manualas your receive mode.  
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?  
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Onlyas your receive mode.  
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?  
Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?  
The Fax/Telreceive mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the  
same line. Choose Fax/Telas your receive mode. (See Fax/Tel on page 46.)  
Important Note: You cannot receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering machine  
with the Fax/Telmode.  
Do you expect to receive very few faxes?  
Choose Manualas your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call  
yourself. (See Manual on page 46.)  
44  
     
Receiving a Fax  
To set the receive mode follow the instructions below:  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Initial Setup.  
c Press Initial Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Receive Mode.  
Note  
If the Receive Mode option is not displayed, make sure the Distinctive Ring feature is set to  
e Press Receive Mode.  
f Press Fax Only, Fax/Telor Manual.  
6
g Press Stop/Exit.  
The LCD will show the current receive mode.  
45  
Chapter 6  
Manual  
6
Using Receive Modes  
6
Manual mode turns off all automatic  
answering functions unless you are using the  
Distinctive Ring feature or an external  
telephone answering device (TAD).  
Some receive modes answer automatically  
(Fax Onlyand Fax/Tel). You may want to  
change the ring delay before using these  
modes. (See Ring Delay on page 47.)  
To receive a fax in manual mode, press  
Speaker Phone or lift the handset of the  
machine or an external telephone. When you  
hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press  
Black Start or Color Start and choose  
Receive. You can also use the Easy  
Fax Only  
6
Fax Only mode will automatically answer  
every call as a fax call.  
Receive feature to receive faxes by lifting a  
handset on the same line as the machine.  
Fax/Tel  
6
Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically  
manage incoming calls, by recognizing  
whether they are fax or voice calls and  
handling them in one of the following ways:  
Message Center (MC)  
6
Message Center (MC) helps you automatically  
manage incoming calls, by recognizing  
whether they are fax or voice calls and  
handling them in one of the following ways:  
Faxes will be automatically received.  
Voice calls will start the F/T Ring to tell you  
to pick up the line. The F/T Ring is a fast  
pseudo/double-ring made by your  
machine.  
Faxes will be automatically received.  
Voice callers can record a message.  
To set up the Message Center mode see  
If Message Center Mode is On, it  
will override your receive mode  
setting. The screen shows MC.  
If Message Center Mode is Off, the  
receive mode returns to your  
original setting. (See Message  
46  
                 
Receiving a Fax  
F/T Ring Time  
(Fax/Tel mode only)  
Receive mode settings  
6
6
Ring Delay  
6
When somebody calls your machine, you and  
your caller will hear the normal telephone ring  
sound. The number of rings is set by the ring  
delay setting.  
The Ring Delay sets the number of times the  
machine rings before it answers in  
Fax Only, Fax/Telor MCmode. If you  
have external or extension telephones on the  
same line as the machine, keep the ring delay  
setting of 4 rings.  
If the call is a fax, then your machine will  
receive it; however, if it is a voice call the  
machine will sound the F/T Ring (a fast  
pseudo/double-ring) for the time you have set  
in the F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the  
F/T Ring it means that you have a voice caller  
on the line.  
If toll saver is On, then the ring delay setting  
has no effect. See Setting toll saver  
Because the F/T Ring is made by the  
machine, extension and external telephones  
will not ring; however, you can still answer the  
call on any telephone. (For more information  
6
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display Ring Delay.  
g Press Ring Delay.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display  
F/T Ring Time.  
h Press Ring Delayagain.  
g Press F/T Ring Time.  
i Press the number of times the machine  
will ring before it answers  
(0, 1, 2, 3 or 4).  
h Press how long the machine will ring to  
alert you that you have a voice call (20,  
30, 40 or 70 seconds).  
If you choose 0, the line will not ring at  
all.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Even if the caller hangs up during the  
pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will  
continue to ring for the set time.  
47  
         
Chapter 6  
a Press MENU.  
Easy Receive  
6
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
If Easy Receive is On:  
6
The machine can receive a fax automatically,  
even if you answer the call. When you see  
Receivingon the LCD or hear a click on the  
phone line through the handset you are  
using, just replace the handset. Your  
machine will do the rest.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display Easy Receive.  
g Press Easy Receive.  
h Press On, Semi(or Off).  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
If Easy Receive is Semi:  
6
The machine will only receive a fax call  
automatically if you answered it using the  
machine’s handset or Speaker Phone. If you  
answered at an extension telephone  
press l 5 1. (See Using external and  
If Easy Receive is Off:  
6
If you are at the machine and answer a call  
first by pressing Speaker Phone or lifting a  
handset, then press Black Start or  
Color Start, and then press Receiveto  
receive.  
If you answered at an extension telephone  
press l 5 1. (See Using external and  
Note  
• If this feature is set to On, but your  
machine does not connect a fax call when  
you lift an extension or external telephone  
handset, press the fax receive code l 5 1.  
• If you send faxes from a computer on the  
same telephone line and the machine  
intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.  
48  
   
Receiving a Fax  
j Press Backup Print:Onor  
Memory Receive  
(Black & White only)  
Backup Print:Off.  
6
IMPORTANT  
You can only use one Memory Receive  
operation at a time.  
• If you choose Backup Print:On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is a  
safety feature in case there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine.  
Backup Print:Onfeature does not  
work if Fax Preview is on.  
Fax Forwarding  
Paging  
Fax Storage  
PC Fax Receive  
Off  
• The machine can store faxes for  
approximately 24 hours if there is a power  
failure.  
You can change your selection at any time. If  
received faxes are still in the machine’s  
memory when you change the memory  
receive operation, an LCD question will  
appear on the LCD. (See Changing Memory  
• When you receive a color fax, your  
machine prints the color fax at your  
machine but does not send the fax to the  
fax forwarding number you programmed.  
6
Fax Forwarding  
6
k Press Stop/Exit.  
When you choose Fax Forwarding, your  
machine stores the received fax in the  
memory. The machine will then dial the fax  
number you have programmed and forward  
the fax message.  
Paging  
6
When you choose Paging, your machine  
dials the cell phone or pager number you  
have programmed. This activates your cell  
phone or pager so you will know that you  
have a fax message in the memory.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
If you have set Paging, a backup copy of the  
received fax will automatically be printed at  
the machine.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
a Press MENU.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
f Press a or b to display  
Memory Receive.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
g Press Memory Receive.  
h Press Fax Forward.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
i Enter the forwarding number (up to  
f Press a or b to display  
Memory Receive.  
20 digits) using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
49  
       
Chapter 6  
g Press Memory Receive.  
h Press Paging.  
Note  
• You cannot change a paging number or  
PIN remotely.  
i Enter your cell phone or pager phone  
number. For pager numbers enter ##  
after the number. (You can enter up to  
20 digits including the ##.)  
• Paging does not work when you receive a  
color fax.  
• If you want to be paged for voice  
messages, make sure you pressed the  
Message Center button on the control  
panel to turn the Message Center on.  
Press OK.  
Do not include the area code if it is the  
same as that of your machine.  
For example, press:  
Fax Storage  
6
1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #.  
j Do one of the following:  
If you choose Fax Storage, your machine  
stores the received fax in the memory. You  
will be able to retrieve fax messages from  
another location using the remote retrieval  
commands.  
If you are programming your cell  
phone number and do not need to  
enter a PIN, press OK.  
If your pager needs a PIN, enter the  
PIN, press #, press Pause, and then  
enter your fax number followed by  
# # using the buttons on the LCD.  
If you have set Fax Storage, a backup copy  
will automatically be printed at the machine.  
a Press MENU.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
For example, press:  
1 2 3 4 5 # Pause1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8  
9 # #  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
If you do not need a PIN, press  
Pause, and then enter your fax  
number followed by # # using the  
buttons on the LCD.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display  
Memory Receive.  
Press OK.  
For example, press:  
g Press Memory Receive.  
h Press Fax Storage.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
Pause1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 # #  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Color faxes cannot be stored in the  
memory. When you receive a color fax  
your machine prints the color fax at your  
machine.  
50  
   
Receiving a Fax  
k Press Backup Print:Onor  
PC Fax Receive  
(Windows only)  
Backup Print:Off.  
®
6
l Press Stop/Exit.  
If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature  
your machine will store received faxes in  
memory and send them to your PC  
automatically. You can then use your PC to  
view and store these faxes.  
Note  
• PC Fax Receive is not supported in the  
Mac OS.  
• Before you can set up PC Fax Receive  
you must install the MFL-Pro Suite  
software on your PC. Make sure your PC  
is connected and turned on. (For details  
see PC-FAX Receiving in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night  
or on the weekend, for example), your  
machine will receive and store your faxes in  
its memory. The number of received faxes  
that are stored in the memory will appear on  
the LCD.  
• If you get an error message and the  
machine cannot print the faxes in memory,  
you can use this setting to transfer your  
faxes to your PC. (For details, see Error  
When you start your PC and the PC-FAX  
Receiving software runs, your machine  
transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.  
6
To transfer the received faxes to your PC you  
must have the PC-FAX Receiving software  
running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX  
receiving in the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
• When you receive a color fax, your  
machine prints the color fax at your  
machine but does not send the fax to your  
PC.  
If you choose Backup Print:Onthe  
machine will also print the fax.  
a Press MENU.  
IMPORTANT  
In the event of a power failure, the  
machine will store your faxes in the  
memory for approximately 24 hours.  
However, if you choose  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
Backup Print:Onthe machine will print  
the fax before it is sent to the PC, so you  
will have a copy if there is a power failure.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display  
Memory Receive.  
g Press Memory Receive.  
h Press PC Fax Receive.  
i Press <USB>or the PC you want to  
receive faxes.  
j Press OK.  
51  
   
Chapter 6  
Changing the destination PC  
a Press MENU.  
6
Turning off Memory Receive  
Operations  
6
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display  
Memory Receive.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display  
Memory Receive.  
g Press Memory Receive.  
h Press PC Fax Receive.  
g Press Memory Receive.  
h Press Off.  
i Press <USB>or the PC you want to  
receive faxes.  
Press OK.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
j Press Backup Print:Onor  
Backup Print:Off.  
Note  
The LCD will give you more options if  
there are received faxes still in your  
machine’s memory. (See Changing  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
52  
 
Receiving a Fax  
Changing Memory Receive  
Operations  
Fax Preview  
(Black & White only)  
6
6
If received faxes remain in your machine’s  
memory when you change the Memory  
Receive Operations, the LCD will ask you  
one of the following questions:  
How to preview a received fax  
6
You can view received faxes on the LCD by  
pressing the Fax Previewbutton on the  
LCD. When the machine is in Ready mode, a  
popup message will appear on the LCD to  
alert you of new faxes.  
Erase All Fax?  
Print All Fax?  
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory  
will be erased or printed before the  
setting changes. If a backup copy has  
already been printed it will not be  
printed again.  
Setting Fax Preview  
a Press MENU.  
6
• If you press No, faxes in the memory  
will not be erased or printed and the  
setting will be unchanged.  
6
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
If received faxes are left in the machine's  
memory when you change to  
PC Fax Receivefrom another option  
[Fax Forward, Pagingor Fax Storage],  
press a or b to choose <USB>or the PC.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display Fax Preview.  
g Press Fax Preview.  
h Press On(or Off).  
The LCD will ask you the following question:  
Send Fax to PC?  
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory  
will be sent to your PC before the  
setting changes. You will be asked if  
you want to turn on Backup Print. (For  
i Press Yes.  
j The LCD will tell you that any future  
faxes will not be printed as you receive  
them.  
Press Yes.  
• If you press No, faxes in the memory  
will not be erased or transferred to your  
PC and the setting will be unchanged.  
53  
         
Chapter 6  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
Button  
Description  
Note  
Enlarge the fax.  
• When Fax Preview is turned on your  
machine can only print the color faxes it  
receives. It cannot store them in memory.  
Reduce the fax.  
Scroll vertically.  
or  
• When Fax Preview is turned on a backup  
copy of received faxes will not be printed,  
even if you have set Backup Print On.  
Scroll horizontally.  
or  
• Fax Preview is not available when  
Fax Forwarding or PC Fax Receive is  
turned on.  
Rotate the fax clockwise.  
Delete the fax.  
Press Yesto confirm.  
Using Fax Preview  
6
Go back to the previous page.  
When you receive a fax, you will see the  
pop-up message on the LCD. (For example:  
New Fax 02)  
Go to the next page.  
Go back to the fax list.  
Print the fax.  
a Press Fax Preview.  
The LCD will display the new fax list.  
Close the preview table.  
Note  
You can also see your old fax list by  
pressing the Old Faxtab on the LCD.  
Press the New Faxtab to go back to your  
new fax list.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
b Press a or b to display the fax number of  
the fax you want to see.  
c Press the fax you want to see.  
Note  
• If your fax is large there may be a delay  
before it is displayed on the LCD.  
• The LCD will show the current page  
number and total pages of the fax  
message. When your fax message is over  
99 pages the total number of pages will be  
shown as “XX”.  
When the fax is displayed, press More.  
The buttons will appear on the LCD and  
you can perform the operations shown  
below.  
54  
Receiving a Fax  
How to print a fax  
6
Turning off Fax Preview  
6
a Press Fax Preview.  
b Press the fax you want to view.  
c Press More.  
a Press Fax Preview.  
b Press More.  
c Press Turn Off Fax Preview.  
d Press Yesto confirm.  
d Press  
(Print).  
If the fax is multiple pages, go to  
step e.  
e If there are faxes stored in the memory,  
do one of the following:  
If the fax is a single page it will start  
printing. Go to step f.  
If you do not want to print the stored  
faxes, press Continue.  
e Do one of the following:  
Press Yesto confirm. Your faxes will  
be deleted.  
Press Print All Pagesto print  
6
all pages of the fax.  
If you want to print all the stored  
faxes, press Print all faxes.  
Press Print Displayed Onlyto  
print the displayed page.  
If you do not wish to turn off Fax  
Preview, press Cancel.  
Press Print From Displayedto  
print the displayed page to the last  
page.  
Press Stop/Exit.  
f Do one of the following:  
To delete the fax, press Yes.  
To keep the fax in the memory,  
press No.  
How to print all faxes in the list  
a Press Fax Preview.  
b Press More.  
6
c Press Print All.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
How to delete all faxes in the list  
a Press Fax Preview.  
b Press More.  
6
c Press Delete All.  
Press Yesto confirm.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
55  
       
Chapter 6  
Receiving a fax at the end of a  
conversation  
Additional receiving  
operations  
6
6
At the end of a conversation you can ask the  
other party to fax you information before you  
both hang up.  
Printing a reduced incoming  
fax  
6
a Ask the other party to place the  
document in their machine and to press  
the Start or Send key.  
If you choose On, the machine automatically  
reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on  
one page of Letter, Legal or A4 size paper.  
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by  
using the page size of the fax and your Paper  
Size setting. (See Paper Size on page 24.)  
b When you hear the other machine's  
CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps),  
press Black Start or Color Start.  
a Press MENU.  
c Press Receiveto receive the fax.  
d Replace the handset.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
Receiving faxes into memory  
when the paper tray is empty  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
6
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty  
during fax reception, the LCD shows  
No Paper Fedand begins receiving faxes  
into the machine’s memory. Put some paper  
in the paper tray. (See Loading paper and  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display  
Auto Reduction.  
g Press Auto Reduction.  
h Press On(or Off).  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
The machine will carry on receiving the fax,  
with the remaining pages being stored in  
memory, if enough memory is available.  
Further incoming faxes will also be stored into  
memory until the memory is full. When the  
memory is full the machine will stop  
automatically answering calls. To print the  
faxes, put fresh paper in the tray.  
56  
       
Receiving a Fax  
Printing a fax from the  
memory  
Remote Retrieval  
6
6
You can call your machine from any touch  
tone telephone or fax machine, then use the  
remote access code and remote commands  
to retrieve fax messages.  
If you have chosen Paging or Fax Storage,  
you can still print a fax from the memory when  
you are at your machine. When a fax is  
displayed, press More. If you have chosen  
Setting a Remote Access  
Code  
6
a Press MENU.  
The remote access code lets you access the  
remote retrieval features when you are away  
from your machine. Before you can use the  
remote access and retrieval features, you  
have to set up your own code. The factory  
default code is the inactive code (---l).  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display Print Fax.  
e Press Print Fax.  
f Press Black Start.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
6
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
Note  
d Press a or b to display  
Remote Access.  
When you print a fax from the memory, the  
fax data will be erased. (For details about  
the Memory Receive options and the Fax  
Storage setting, see Memory Receive  
e Press Remote Access.  
f Enter a 3-digit code using numbers 0-9,  
l, or #by pressing the buttons on the  
LCD.  
Press OK.  
(The preset ‘l’ cannot be changed.)  
Note  
Do not use the same code as your Fax  
Receive Code (l 5 1) or Telephone  
Answer Code (# 5 1). (See Using external  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
You can change your code at any time by  
entering a new one. If you want to make  
Clear  
your code inactive, press  
in step f  
to restore the inactive setting (---l) and  
press OK.  
57  
       
Chapter 6  
Using your Remote Access  
Code  
6
a Dial your fax number from a touch tone  
telephone or another fax machine.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your remote access code (3 digits  
followed by l) at once.  
c The machine signals if it has received  
messages:  
1 long beep — Fax messages  
2 long beeps — Voice messages  
3 long beeps — Fax & Voice  
messages  
No beeps — No messages  
d When the machine gives two short  
beeps, enter a command.  
The machine will hang up if you wait  
longer than 30 seconds to enter a  
command.  
The machine will beep three times if you  
enter an invalid command.  
e Press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when  
you have finished.  
f Hang up.  
Note  
If your machine is set to Manualmode  
and you want to use the remote retrieval  
features, wait for about 100 seconds after  
it starts ringing, and then enter the remote  
access code within 30 seconds.  
58  
 
Receiving a Fax  
Remote Fax commands  
6
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you  
call the machine and enter your remote access code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give  
two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.  
Remote commands  
Operation details  
91  
Playing Voice messages  
After one long beep, the machine plays the ICM.  
1 Repeat or Skip Backward  
Press 1 while listening to an ICM to repeat it. If you press 1  
before a message, you will hear the previous message.  
2 Skip Forward  
9 STOP Playing  
Erase all ICM  
While playing the ICM, you can skip to the next message.  
Stop playing the ICM.  
93  
94  
If you hear one long beep, the erase is accepted. If you hear  
three short beeps, you cannot erase the messages because  
all voice messages have not been played, or there are no  
voice messages to erase.  
6
*This code erases all recorded messages, not one at a time.  
Play and Record OGM in Memory  
1 Play  
1 Msg Ctr OGM  
2 F/T OGM  
The machine plays the selected OGM. You can stop playing  
the OGM by pressing 9.  
2 Record  
1 Msg Ctr OGM  
2 F/T OGM  
After one long beep, you can record the selected OGM. You  
will hear the message played once. You can stop recording  
the message by pressing 9.  
95  
Change the Fax Forwarding,  
Paging or Fax Storage settings  
1 OFF  
You can choose Offafter you have retrieved or erased all  
your messages.  
2 Fax Forwarding  
3 Paging  
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear  
three short beeps, you cannot change it because something  
has not been set up (for example, a Fax Forwarding or  
Paging number has not been registered). You can register  
your Fax Forwarding number by entering 4. (See Changing  
registered the number, Fax Forwarding will work.  
4 Fax Forwarding number  
6 Fax Storage  
96  
97  
Retrieve a fax  
2 Retrieve all faxes  
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored  
3 Erase faxes from the memory  
If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased  
from the memory.  
Check the receiving status  
1 Fax  
You can check whether your machine has received any  
faxes or voice messages. If yes, you will hear one long  
beep. If no, you will hear three short beeps.  
2 Voice  
59  
 
Chapter 6  
Remote commands  
Operation details  
98  
Change the Receive Mode  
1 Msg Ctr  
2 Fax/Tel  
3 Fax Only  
Exit  
If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.  
90  
Pressing 9 0 allows you to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the  
long beep, then replace the handset.  
Retrieving fax messages  
6
Changing your Fax  
Forwarding number  
6
You can call your machine from any touch  
tone telephone and have your fax messages  
sent to a machine. Before you use this  
feature, you have to turn on Fax Storage.  
You can change the default setting of your fax  
forwarding number from another touch tone  
telephone or fax machine.  
a Dial your fax number.  
a Dial your fax number.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your remote access code (3 digits  
followed by l) at once. If you hear one  
long beep, you have messages.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your remote access code (3 digits  
followed by l) at once. If you hear one  
long beep, you have messages.  
c When you hear two short beeps,  
press 9 6 2.  
c When you hear two short beeps,  
press 9 5 4.  
d Wait for the long beep, enter the number  
(up to 20 digits) of the remote fax  
d Wait for the long beep, enter the new  
number (up to 20 digits) of the remote  
fax machine you want your fax  
messages forwarded to using the dial  
pad, then enter # #.  
machine you want your fax messages  
sent to using the dial pad, then enter # #.  
Note  
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.  
However, press # if you want to create a  
pause.  
Note  
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.  
However, press # if you want to create a  
pause.  
e Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep. Your machine will call the other  
fax machine, which will then print your  
fax messages.  
e Press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when  
you have finished.  
f Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep.  
60  
       
Telephone Services and External  
devices  
7
7
Answering calls with the  
Speaker Phone  
Voice operations  
7
7
Voice calls can be made either with the  
handset, the speaker phone, or an external  
telephone, by dialing manually, or by using  
Quick Dial numbers.  
When the machine rings, instead of lifting the  
handset, press Speaker Phone on the  
machine. Speak clearly toward the  
microphone . To end the call, press  
Speaker Phone.  
Making a telephone call  
7
Note  
a Do one of the following:  
Pick up the handset.  
If you have a bad connection, your caller  
might hear your voice echoed during the  
call. If you experience this problem, pick  
up the handset, or hang up and try the call  
again.  
Press Speaker Phone.  
b When you hear the dial tone, enter a  
number using the dial pad or pressing  
the Speed Dial.  
7
Hold  
7
c If you pressed Speaker Phone speak  
clearly toward the microphone .  
a Press Hold to put a call on Hold.  
You can replace the handset without  
disconnecting the call.  
d To hang up, do one of the following:  
Replace the handset.  
b Pick up the machine's handset or press  
Speaker Phone to release the call from  
Hold.  
Press Speaker Phone.  
Note  
You can pick up an extension telephone  
and continue speaking without releasing  
the call from Hold on the machine.  
61  
         
Chapter 7  
Tone or Pulse  
(Canada only)  
Telephone services  
7
7
Your machine supports the Caller ID and  
Distinctive Ring subscriber telephone  
services that some telephone companies  
offer.  
If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need  
to send Tone signals (for example, for  
telephone banking), follow the instructions  
below:  
Features like Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call  
Waiting/Caller ID, RingMaster, answering  
services, alarm systems or other custom  
features on one telephone line may create  
problems with the operation of your machine.  
If you have Voice Mail on your telephone line,  
please read the following carefully.  
a Pick up the handset or press  
Speaker Phone.  
b Press # on the machine’s control panel.  
Any digits dialed after this will send Tone  
signals.  
When you hang up, the machine will return to  
the Pulse dialing service.  
Voice Mail  
7
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone  
line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and  
the Brother machine will conflict with each  
other when receiving incoming calls.  
Fax/Tel mode  
7
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will  
use the F/T Ring (pseudo/double-ringing) to  
alert you to pick up a voice call.  
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to  
answer after 4 rings and your Brother  
machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then  
your Brother machine will answer first. This  
will prevent callers from being able to leave a  
message in your Voice Mail.  
If you are at the extension telephone, you'll  
need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring  
and then press # 5 1 between the  
pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line,  
or if someone wants to send you a fax, send  
the call back to the machine by pressing  
l 5 1.  
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to  
answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set  
to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail  
will answer first. This will prevent your Brother  
machine from being able to receive an  
incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot  
transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother  
machine.  
If you are at the machine, you can lift the  
handset or press Speaker Phone to answer.  
To avoid conflicts between your Brother  
machine and your voice mail service, do one  
of the following:  
62  
       
Telephone Services and External devices  
Get the Distinctive Ring service from your  
telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a  
feature of your Brother machine that allows a  
person with one line to receive fax and voice  
calls through two different phone numbers on  
that one line. Brother uses the term  
Distinctive Ring  
7
Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother  
machine that allows a person with one line to  
receive fax and voice calls through two  
different phone numbers on that one line.  
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring,” but  
telephone companies market the service  
under a variety of names, such as Smart  
Ring, Ring Master or Ident-a-Ring. This  
service establishes a second telephone  
number on the same line as your existing  
telephone number, and each number has its  
own ring pattern. Typically, the original  
number rings with the standard ring pattern  
and is used for receiving voice calls, and the  
second number rings with a different ring  
pattern and is used for receiving faxes.  
‘Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone companies  
market the service under a variety of names,  
such as Custom Ringing, Personalized Ring,  
Smart Ring, RingMaster, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-  
A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call, Teen Ring, and  
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing.  
This service establishes a second telephone  
number on the same line as your existing  
telephone number, and each number has its  
own ring pattern. Typically, the original  
number rings with the standard ring pattern  
and is used for receiving voice calls, and the  
second number rings with a different ring  
pattern and is used for receiving faxes. (See  
Note  
7
• You must pay for your telephone  
OR  
company's Distinctive Ring service before  
you program the machine to work with it.  
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to  
“Manual.” Manual Mode requires that you  
answer every incoming call if you want to be  
able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a  
telephone call, then complete the call as you  
normally would. If you hear fax sending tones  
you must transfer the call to the Brother  
telephones on page 70.) Unanswered fax  
and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To  
set the machine in MANUAL Mode, see  
• Please call your telephone company for  
availability and rates.  
What does your telephone company's  
‘Distinctive Ring’ do?  
7
Your telephone company's Distinctive Ring  
service allows you to have more than one  
number on the same telephone line. If you  
need more than one telephone number, it  
is cheaper than paying for an extra line.  
Each telephone number has its own  
distinctive ring pattern, so you will know  
which telephone number is ringing. This is  
one way you can have a separate telephone  
number for your machine.  
What does Brother's ‘Distinctive Ring’  
do?  
7
The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring  
feature that allows you to use your machine to  
take full advantage of the telephone  
company's Distinctive Ring service. The new  
telephone number on your line can just  
receive faxes.  
63  
   
Chapter 7  
Do you have Voice Mail?  
7
Note  
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line  
that you will install your new machine on,  
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail  
and the machine will conflict with each other  
while receiving incoming calls. However, the  
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use  
more than one number on your line, so  
both Voice Mail and the machine can work  
together without any problems. If each one  
has a separate telephone number, neither will  
interfere with the other's operations.  
Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short  
and is the most commonly used.  
If the ring pattern you received is not on  
this chart, please call your telephone  
company and ask for one that is  
shown.  
The machine will only answer calls to its  
registered number.  
The first two rings are silent on the  
machine. This is because the fax must  
‘listen’ to the ring pattern (to compare it to  
the pattern that was ‘registered’). (Other  
telephones on the same line will ring.)  
If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring  
service from the telephone company, you will  
need to follow the directions on next page to  
‘register’ the new Distinctive Ring pattern  
they give you. This is so your machine can  
recognize its incoming calls.  
If you program the machine properly, it will  
recognize the registered ring pattern of the  
‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and  
then answer with a fax tone. When the  
‘voice number’ is called, the machine will  
not answer.  
Note  
You can change or cancel the Distinctive  
Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it  
off temporarily, and turn it back on later.  
When you get a new fax number, make  
sure you reset this feature.  
Registering the Distinctive Ring  
pattern  
7
Very Important!  
Before you choose the ring pattern to  
register  
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature  
to On, your Distinctive Ring number will  
receive faxes automatically. The receive  
mode is automatically set to Manualand you  
cannot change it to another receive mode  
while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This  
ensures the Brother machine will only answer  
the Distinctive Ring number and not interfere  
when your main telephone number is called.  
7
You can only register one Distinctive Ring  
pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns  
cannot be registered. The ring patterns below  
are supported by your Brother machine.  
Register the one your telephone company  
gives you.  
Ring  
Pattern  
Rings  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
1
2
3
4
long-long  
short-long-short  
short-short-long  
d Press a or b to display  
Miscellaneous.  
very long (normal  
pattern)  
e Press a or b to display Distinctive.  
f Press Distinctive.  
64  
 
Telephone Services and External devices  
g Press Set.  
Caller ID  
7
h Press the stored ring pattern you want to  
The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller  
ID subscriber service offered by many local  
telephone companies. Call your telephone  
company for details. This service shows the  
telephone number, or name if it is available,  
of your caller as the line rings.  
use.  
Press OK.  
(You will hear each pattern as you scroll  
through the four patterns. Make sure  
you choose the pattern that the  
After a few rings, the LCD shows the  
telephone number of your caller (and name, if  
available). Once you answer a call, the Caller  
ID information disappears from the LCD, but  
the call information stays stored in the Caller  
ID memory.  
telephone company gave you.)  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
Distinctive Ring is now set to On.  
Turning off Distinctive Ring  
a Press MENU.  
7
You can view the list or choose one of the  
numbers to fax to, add to Speed Dial or delete  
from the history. (See Caller ID history  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
7
You can see the first 20 characters of the  
number (or name).  
d Press a or b to display  
Miscellaneous.  
The # Unavailablemessage means  
the call originated outside your Caller ID  
service area.  
e Press Miscellaneous.  
f Press Distinctive.  
g Press Off.  
The Private Callmessage means the  
caller has intentionally blocked  
transmission of information.  
You can print a list of the Caller ID information  
received by your machine. (See How to print  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Note  
If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the  
machine will stay in Manualreceive  
mode. You will need to set the Receive  
Mode again. (See Choose the correct  
• This feature may not be available in  
certain areas of the USA and Canada.  
• The Caller ID service varies with different  
carriers. Call your local telephone  
company to find out about the kind of  
service available in your area.  
65  
     
Chapter 7  
Setting up your area code (USA only)  
7
Connecting an external  
TAD (telephone  
answering device)  
When returning calls from the caller ID history  
your machine will automatically dial “1” plus  
the area code for all calls. If your local dialing  
plan requires that the “1” not be used for calls  
within your area code enter your area code in  
this setting. With the area code setting, calls  
returned from the caller ID history to your  
area code will be dialed using 10 digits (area  
code + 7-digit number). If your dialing plan  
does not follow the standard 1 + area code +  
7-digit number dialing system for calling  
outside your area code, you may experience  
problems returning calls automatically from  
the caller ID history. If this is not the  
7
You may choose to connect an external  
answering device. However, when you have  
an external TAD on the same telephone line  
as the machine, the TAD answers all calls  
and the machine ‘listens’ for fax calling (CNG)  
tones. If it hears them, the machine takes  
over the call and receives the fax. If it does  
not hear CNG tones, the machine lets the  
TAD continue playing your outgoing message  
so your caller can leave you a voice  
message.  
procedure followed by your dialing plan, you  
will not be able to return calls automatically.  
The TAD must answer within four rings (the  
recommended setting is two rings). The  
machine cannot hear CNG tones until the  
TAD has answered the call, and with four  
rings there are only 8 to 10 seconds of CNG  
tones left for the fax ‘handshake’. Make sure  
you carefully follow the instructions in this  
guide for recording your outgoing message.  
We do not recommend using the toll saver  
feature on your external answering machine if  
it exceeds five rings.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Miscellaneous.  
e Press Miscellaneous.  
f Press Area Code.  
Note  
g Enter your Area Code (3-digit number)  
using the buttons on the LCD, and press  
OK.  
• If you do not receive all your faxes,  
shorten the Ring Delay setting on your  
external TAD.  
If You Subscribe to your Telephone  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
company's Distinctive Ring Service:  
You may connect an external TAD to a  
separate wall jack only if you subscribe to  
your telephone company's Distinctive  
Ring service, have registered the  
distinctive ring pattern on your machine,  
and use that number as a fax number. The  
recommended setting is at least four rings  
on the external TAD when you have the  
telephone company's Distinctive Ring  
Service. You cannot use the Toll Saver  
setting.  
66  
   
Telephone Services and External devices  
If You Do Not Subscribe to Distinctive  
Connections  
7
Ring Service:  
The external TAD must be plugged into the  
jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot work  
properly if you plug the TAD into a wall jack  
(unless you are using Distinctive Ring).  
You must plug your TAD into the EXT.  
jack of your machine. If your TAD is  
plugged into a wall jack, both your  
machine and the TAD will try to control the  
telephone line. (See the illustration  
below.)  
a Plug the telephone line cord from the  
telephone wall jack into the jack labeled  
LINE.  
b Remove the protective cap (1) from the  
jack labeled EXT, and then plug the  
telephone line cord from the external  
TAD into the EXT. jack. (Make sure this  
cord is connected to the TAD at the  
TAD's telephone line jack, and not its  
handset jack.)  
1
7
1
2
TAD  
Protective Cap  
1
Protective Cap  
When the TAD answers a call, the LCD  
shows Ext. Tel in Use.  
c Set your external TAD to four rings or  
less. (The machine's Ring Delay setting  
does not apply.)  
d Record the outgoing message on your  
external TAD.  
e Set the TAD to answer calls.  
f Set the Receive Mode to Manualwith  
Easy Receive turned on. (See Choose  
67  
 
Chapter 7  
Recording outgoing message  
(OGM) on an external TAD  
Special line considerations  
7
7
Roll over telephone lines  
7
Timing is important in recording this  
message. The message sets up the ways to  
handle both manual and automatic fax  
reception.  
A roll over telephone system is a group of two  
or more separate telephone lines that pass  
incoming calls to each other if they are busy.  
The calls are usually passed down or ‘rolled  
over’ to the next available telephone line in a  
preset order.  
a Record 5 seconds of silence at the  
beginning of your message. (This allows  
your machine time to listen for the fax  
CNG tones of automatic transmissions  
before they stop.)  
Your machine can work in a roll over system  
as long as it is the last number in the  
sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not  
put the machine on any of the other numbers;  
when the other lines are busy and a second  
fax call is received, the fax call will be sent to  
a line that does not have a fax machine. Your  
machine will work best on a dedicated  
line.  
b Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
c End your 20-second message by giving  
your Fax Receive Code for people  
sending manual faxes. For example:  
‘After the beep, leave a message or  
send a fax by pressing l 5 1 and Start.’  
Two-line telephone system  
7
Note  
A two-line telephone system is nothing more  
than two separate telephone numbers on the  
same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers  
can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or mixed into  
one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be  
plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14  
jacks may be equal in size and appearance  
and both may contain four wires (black, red,  
green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in  
a two-line telephone and see if it can access  
both lines. If it can, you must separate the line  
for your machine. (See page 48.)  
We recommend beginning your OGM with  
an initial 5-second silence because the  
machine cannot hear fax tones over a  
resonant or loud voice. You may try  
omitting this pause, but if your machine  
has trouble receiving, then you must  
re-record the OGM to include it.  
Converting telephone wall outlets  
7
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11  
jack. The first two ways may require help from  
the telephone company. You can change the  
wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11  
jacks. Or you can have an RJ11 wall outlet  
installed and slave or jump one of the  
telephone numbers to it.  
68  
         
Telephone Services and External devices  
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex  
adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into  
an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two  
separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a  
third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your  
d Plug one end of the second telephone  
line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of  
the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into  
the EXT. jack on the left side of the  
machine.  
machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into  
L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on  
Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple adapter.  
1
2
Triplex Adapter  
7
RJ14  
4
3
1
2
3
4
Triplex Adapter  
RJ11  
RJ14  
Two Line Telephone  
External Two Line TAD  
Machine  
Installing machine, external two-line  
TAD and two-line telephone  
You can keep two-line telephones on other  
wall outlets as always. There are two ways to  
add a two-line telephone to the machine's  
wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line  
cord from the two-line telephone into the  
L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or you can  
plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack  
of the two-line TAD.  
7
7
When you are installing an external two-line  
telephone answering device (TAD) and a  
two-line telephone, your machine must be  
isolated on one line at both the wall jack and  
at the TAD. The most common connection is  
to put the machine on Line 2, which is  
explained in the following steps. The back of  
the two-line TAD must have two telephone  
jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other  
labeled L2. You will need at least three  
telephone line cords, the one that came with  
your machine and two for your external two-  
line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if  
you add a two-line telephone.  
Multi-line connections (PBX)  
7
We suggest you ask the company who  
installed your PBX to connect your machine.  
If you have a multi line system we suggest  
you ask the installer to connect the unit to the  
last line on the system. This prevents the  
machine being activated each time the  
system receives telephone calls. If all  
incoming calls will be answered by a  
a Put the two-line TAD and the two-line  
telephone next to your machine.  
b Plug one end of the telephone line cord  
for your machine into the L2 jack of the  
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into  
the LINE jack on the back of the  
machine.  
switchboard operator we recommend that  
you set the Receive Mode to Manual.  
We cannot guarantee that your machine will  
operate properly under all circumstances  
when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties  
with sending or receiving faxes should be  
reported first to the company who handles  
your PBX.  
c Plug one end of the first telephone line  
cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the  
triplex adapter. Plug the other end into  
the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.  
69  
   
Chapter 7  
Using external and extension  
telephones  
External and extension  
telephones  
7
7
Using extension telephones  
7
Connecting an external or  
extension telephone  
If you answer a fax call on an extension  
telephone, you can make your machine  
receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive  
Code l 5 1.  
7
You can connect a separate telephone  
directly to your machine as shown in the  
diagram below.  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, use  
the Telephone Answer Code # 5 1 to take the  
call at an extension telephone. (See F/T Ring  
Connect the telephone line cord to the jack  
labeled EXT.  
Before you connect an external telephone,  
remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT.  
jack on the machine.  
Using an external telephone  
(connected to the EXT. jack of the  
machine)  
7
1
If you answer a fax call at the external  
telephone connected to the EXT jack of the  
machine, you can make the machine receive  
the fax by pressing Speaker Phone followed  
2
by Black Start, and then pressing Receive.  
3
If you answer a call and no one is on  
the line:  
7
You should assume that you're receiving a  
manual fax.  
1
2
3
Extension telephone  
External telephone  
Protective Cap  
Press l 5 1 and wait for the chirp or until the  
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.  
Note  
When you are using an external or extension  
telephone, the LCD shows  
You can also use the Easy Receive  
feature to make your machine  
automatically take the call. (See Easy  
Ext. Tel in Use.  
70  
         
Telephone Services and External devices  
Telephone Answer Code  
7
Using a non-Brother cordless  
external telephone  
If you receive a voice call and the machine is  
in Fax/Tel mode, it will start to sound the F/T  
Ring (a fast pseudo/double-ring) after the  
initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an  
extension telephone you can turn the F/T  
Ring off by pressing # 5 1 (make sure you  
press this between the rings).  
7
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is  
connected to the EXT. jack of the machine  
and you typically carry the cordless handset  
elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during  
the Ring Delay.  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at the machine's handset by  
pressing Speaker Phone.  
If you let the machine answer first, you will  
have to go to the machine so you can press  
Speaker Phone to send the call to the  
cordless handset.  
Changing the remote codes  
7
Using remote codes  
7
The preset Fax Receive Code is l 5 1. The  
preset Telephone Answer Code is # 5 1. If  
you want to, you can replace them with your  
own codes.  
Fax Receive code  
7
If you answer a fax call on an extension or  
external telephone, you can tell your machine  
to receive it by dialing the Fax Receive Code  
l 5 1. Wait for the chirping sounds then  
replace the handset. (See Easy Receive  
7
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
If you answer a fax call at the machine’s  
handset, you can make the machine receive  
the fax by pressing Black Start and choosing  
Receive.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
e Press Setup Receive.  
If you answer a fax call at an external  
telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the  
machine, you can make the machine receive  
the fax by pressing Speaker Phone, followed  
f Press a or b to display Remote Codes.  
g Press Remote Codes.  
by Black Start, and then pressing Receive.  
h Press On(or Off).  
i Do one of the following:  
If you want to change the Fax  
Receive Code, enter the new code.  
Press OK, go to step j.  
If you do not want to change the Fax  
Receive Code, press OK, go to  
step j.  
71  
         
Chapter 7  
j Do one of the following:  
If you want to change the Telephone  
Answer Code, enter the new code.  
Press OK, go to step k.  
If you do not want to change the  
Telephone Answer Code, press OK,  
go to step k.  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• If you are always disconnected when  
accessing your external TAD remotely, try  
changing the Fax Receive Code and  
Telephone Answer Code to another  
3-digit code (such as # # # and 9 9 9).  
• Remote Codes might not work with some  
telephone systems.  
72  
   
Dialing and storing numbers  
8
8
Fax Redial  
8
How to Dial  
8
If you are sending a fax manually and the line  
is busy, press Redial, and then press  
Black Start or Color Start to try again. If you  
want to make a second call to a number you  
recently dialed, you can press Redial and  
choose one of the last 30 numbers from the  
Outgoing Call List.  
Manual dialing  
8
Press all of the digits of the fax or telephone  
number using the dial pad.  
Redial only works if you dialed from the  
control panel. If you are sending a fax  
automatically and the line is busy, the  
machine will automatically redial once after  
five minutes.  
a Press Redial.  
b Press the number you want to redial.  
c Press Send a fax.  
8
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Speed Dialing  
8
Note  
a Press Speed Dial.  
In Real Time Transmission the automatic  
redial feature does not work when you are  
using the scanner glass.  
b Press the number you want to call. You  
can also choose the number by  
#
01  
alphabetical order by pressing  
LCD.  
on  
c Do one of the following:  
Press Send a faxand go to  
step d.  
Press Make a phone call. The  
machine will start dialing.  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Note  
If the LCD shows Not Registered  
when you enter or search a Speed Dial  
number, a number has not been stored at  
this location.  
73  
             
Chapter 8  
Outgoing Call  
8
Caller ID history  
8
The last 30 numbers you called or sent a fax  
to will be stored in the outgoing call history.  
You can choose one of these numbers to  
telephone, to fax to, add to Speed Dial or  
delete from the history.  
This feature requires the Caller ID subscriber  
service offered by many local telephone  
companies. (See Caller ID on page 65.)  
The number, or name if available, from the  
last 30 faxes and telephone calls you  
received will be stored in the Caller ID history.  
You can view the list or choose one of these  
numbers to telephone, to fax to, add to  
Speed Dial or delete from the history. When  
the thirty-first call comes in to the machine, it  
replaces information about the first call.  
a Press Redial.  
You can also press Call History.  
b Press Outgoing Calltab.  
c Press the number you want.  
d Do one of the following:  
a Press Call History.  
b Press Caller ID hist.  
To make a telephone call, press  
Make a phone call.  
c Press the number or the name you want  
To send a fax, press Send a fax.  
Press Black Start or Color Start.  
to call.  
d Do one of the following:  
If you want to store the number,  
press Moreand then press  
Add to Speed Dial.  
To make a telephone call, press  
Make a phone call.  
To send a fax, press Send a fax.  
Press Black Start or Color Start.  
If you want to store the number,  
press Moreand then press  
Add to Speed Dial.  
If you want to delete the number from  
the Outgoing Call history list, press  
Moreand then press Delete.  
Press Yesto confirm.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
If you want to delete the number from  
the Caller ID history list, press More  
and then press Delete.  
Press Yesto confirm.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• (USA only) If you redial from the Caller ID  
history outside your area code, you must  
set up your AREA CODE in advance.  
• You can print the Caller ID List.  
74  
   
Dialing and storing numbers  
e Enter the first fax or telephone number  
Storing numbers  
8
(up to 20 digits) using the buttons on the  
LCD.  
Press OK.  
You can set up your machine to do the  
following types of easy dialing: Speed Dial  
and Groups for broadcasting faxes. When  
you dial a Quick Dial number, the LCD shows  
the name, if you stored it, or the number.  
f Do one of the following:  
Enter the second fax or telephone  
number (up to 20 digits) using the  
buttons on the LCD.  
Note  
Press OK.  
If you lose electrical power, the Quick Dial  
numbers that are in the memory will not be  
lost.  
If you do not want to store a second  
number, press OK.  
g To choose where the number will be  
Storing a pause  
8
stored, do one of the following:  
To accept the displayed next  
available Speed Dial location,  
press OK.  
Press Pauseto put a 3.5-second pause  
between numbers. If you are dialing  
overseas, you can press Pauseas many  
times as needed to increase the length of the  
pause.  
To enter a different Speed Dial  
location, press a 2-digit number  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
8
Storing Speed Dial numbers  
8
Note  
You can store up to 100 2-digit Speed Dial  
locations with a name, and each name can  
have two numbers (Fax/Tel1:and  
Fax/Tel2:). When you dial you will only  
have to press a few keys. (For example:  
Press Speed Dial, the number you want to  
make a call and Make a phone call.)  
If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you  
choose is already taken, the OKbutton on  
the LCD will not work. Choose a different  
location.  
h When the LCD displays your settings,  
press OKto confirm.  
a Press Speed Dial.  
b Press More.  
i Do one of the following:  
To store another Speed Dial  
number, go to step b.  
c Press Set Speed Dial.  
To finish storing numbers, press  
Stop/Exit.  
d Do one of the following:  
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
(To help you enter letters, see  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
75  
         
Chapter 8  
i To choose where the number will be  
Storing Speed Dial numbers  
from Outgoing Calls  
stored, do one of the following:  
8
To accept the displayed next  
available Speed Dial location,  
press OK.  
You can store Speed Dial numbers from the  
Outgoing Call history.  
To enter a different Speed Dial  
location, press a 2-digit number  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
a Press Redial.  
You can also choose the number by  
pressing Call History.  
Press OK.  
b Press Outgoing Call.  
Note  
c Press the name or number you want to  
If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you  
choose is already taken, the OKbutton on  
the LCD will not work. Choose a different  
location.  
store.  
d Press More.  
e Press Add to Speed Dial.  
j When the LCD displays your settings,  
press OKto confirm.  
f Do one of the following:  
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
Storing Speed Dial numbers  
from the Caller ID history  
(To help you enter letters, see  
8
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
If you have the Caller ID subscriber service  
from your telephone company you can also  
store Speed Dial numbers from incoming  
calls in the Caller ID History. (See Caller ID  
g Press OKto confirm the fax or telephone  
number you want to store.  
h Do one of the following:  
a Press Call History.  
b Press Caller ID hist.  
Enter the second fax or telephone  
number (up to 20 digits) using the  
buttons on the LCD.  
c Press the name or number you want to  
Press OK.  
store.  
If you do not want to store a second  
number, press OK.  
d Press More.  
e Press Add to Speed Dial.  
76  
       
Dialing and storing numbers  
f Do one of the following:  
Changing Speed Dial names  
or numbers  
Enter the name (up to 16 characters)  
8
using the buttons on the LCD.  
You can change or delete a Speed Dial name  
or number that has already been stored.  
Press OK.  
(To help you enter letters, see  
a Press Speed Dial.  
b Press More.  
To store the number without a name,  
press OK.  
c Do one of the following:  
g Press OKto confirm the fax or telephone  
number you want to store.  
Press Changeto edit the names or  
numbers.  
h Do one of the following:  
Press Deleteto delete all  
Enter a second fax or telephone  
number (up to 20 digits) using the  
buttons on the LCD.  
information in a Speed Dial location.  
Press the number you want to delete.  
Press OK. Press Yesto confirm.  
Go to step h.  
Press OK.  
If you do not want to store a second  
number, press OK.  
d Press the number you want to change.  
8
i To choose where the number will be  
e Press Name:, Fax/Tel1:or  
Fax/Tel2:.  
stored, do one of the following:  
To accept the displayed next  
available Speed Dial location,  
press OK.  
f Do one of the following:  
If you chose Name:, enter the name  
(up to 16 characters) using the  
buttons on the LCD.  
To enter a different Speed Dial  
location, press a 2-digit number  
using the buttons on the LCD.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
If you chose Fax/Tel1:or  
Fax/Tel2:, enter the new number  
(up to 20 digits) using the buttons on  
the LCD.  
Note  
If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you  
choose is already taken, the OKbutton on  
the LCD will not work. Choose a different  
location.  
Press OK.  
Note  
j When the LCD displays your settings,  
press OKto confirm.  
How to change the stored name or  
number:  
k Press Stop/Exit.  
If you want to change a character, press  
d or c to position the cursor under the  
character you want to change, and then  
press  
. Re-enter the character.  
77  
     
Chapter 8  
g Do one of the following:  
f Add Speed Dial numbers to the Group  
by pressing them to display a red  
checkmark. Press OK.  
To change more details, go to  
step f.  
If you want to list the numbers by  
To change another Speed Dial  
location, press OKand repeat  
steps b to f.  
#
01  
alphabetical order, press  
.
g When the LCD displays the Group  
Name and numbers, press OKto  
confirm.  
If you are finished making changes,  
press OK.  
h Do one of the following:  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
To store another Group for  
broadcasting, repeat steps b to g.  
Setting up groups for  
broadcasting  
To finish storing Groups for  
broadcasting, press Stop/Exit.  
8
Groups, which can be stored on a Speed Dial  
location, allow you to send the same fax  
message to many fax numbers by pressing  
only a Speed Dial, the 2-digit location,  
Send a faxand Black Start. First, you'll  
need to store each fax number in a Speed-  
Dial location. Then you can include them as  
numbers in the Group. Each Group uses up a  
Speed Dial location. You can have up to six  
Groups, or you can assign up to 198 numbers  
in a large Group if you have 2 numbers in  
each location.  
Note  
You can print a list of all the Speed Dial  
numbers. Group numbers will be marked  
in the GROUP column. (See Reports  
Changing a Group name  
a Press Speed Dial.  
b Press More.  
8
c Press Change.  
d Press a or b to display the Group you  
want to change.  
a Press Speed Dial.  
b Press More.  
e Press the Group.  
f Press Name:.  
c Press Setup Groups.  
d Enter the Group name (up to  
16 characters) using the buttons on the  
LCD.  
Press OK.  
e When the LCD displays the next  
available Group number, press OKto  
confirm.  
This Group number and name will  
automatically be assigned to the next  
available Speed Dial location.  
78  
       
Dialing and storing numbers  
g Enter the new name (up to  
16 characters) using the buttons on the  
LCD.  
Deleting a number from a Group  
a Press Speed Dial.  
b Press More.  
8
Press OK.  
example, type NEW CLIENTS.)  
c Press Change.  
Note  
d Press a or b to display the Group you  
How to change the stored name or  
number:  
want to change.  
e Press the Group.  
If you want to change a character, press  
d or c to position the cursor under the  
character you want to change, and then  
f Press Add/Delete.  
press  
. Re-enter the character.  
g Press a or b to display the number you  
want to delete from the Group.  
h Press OK.  
h Press the check box of the number you  
want to delete to uncheck it.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
Press OKto confirm.  
Deleting a Group  
a Press Speed Dial.  
b Press More.  
8
i Press OK.  
8
j Press Stop/Exit.  
c Press Delete.  
d Press a or b to display the Group you  
want to delete.  
e Press the Group.  
f Press OK.  
g Press Yesto confirm.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
79  
Chapter 8  
To temporarily change a number, you can  
substitute part of the number with manual  
dialing using the dial pad. For example, to  
change the number to 555-7001 you could  
press Speed Dial, choose #03, press  
Send a faxor Make a phone call, and  
then press 7001 using the dial pad.  
Dialing Access codes and  
credit card numbers  
8
Sometimes you may want to choose from  
several long distance carriers when you  
make a call. Rates may vary depending on  
the time and destination. To take advantage  
of low rates, you can store the access codes  
of long-distance carriers and credit card  
numbers as Speed Dial numbers. You can  
store these long dialing sequences by  
dividing them and setting them up as  
separate Speed Dial numbers in any  
combination. You can even include manual  
dialing using the dial pad. (See Storing  
Note  
If you must wait for another dial tone or  
signal at any point in the dialing sequence,  
create a pause in the number by pressing  
Pause. Each key press adds a 3.5-second  
delay.  
For example, you might have stored ‘555 ’ on  
Speed Dial: 03 and ‘7000 ’ on Speed Dial: 02.  
You can use them both to dial ‘555-7000’ if  
you press the following keys:  
a Press Speed Dial.  
b Press #03.  
c Press Send a faxor  
Make a phone call.  
d Press Speed Dial.  
e Press #02.  
f Do one of the following:  
To make a telephone call, press  
Make a phone call.  
To send a fax, press Send a fax.  
Go to step g.  
g Press Black Start or Color Start.  
You will dial ‘555-7000 ’.  
80  
   
Message Center  
9
9
Outgoing message (OGM)  
9
Message Center mode  
9
The Message Center feature will store up to  
99 incoming messages. Messages are stored  
in the order in which they are received.  
Recording your OGM  
9
You can record the following two different  
types of OGM:  
Voice messages can be up to 3 minutes in  
length, and can also be picked up remotely  
on page 58). The number of messages you  
can store will depend on how much memory  
is being used by other features (for example,  
delayed and stored faxes).  
Msg Ctr OGM  
This message will be played when a call is  
received. The caller will be able to leave a  
voice or fax message.  
F/T OGM  
This message is played when a call is  
received and your machine is set to  
Fax/Tel mode. The caller will not be able  
to leave a message. See Fax/Tel OGM  
In the event of a power failure your machine  
will retain messages that are in the memory  
for approximately 24 hours.  
Setting up the Message  
Center  
Your OGM must be less than 20 seconds  
long.  
9
Recording the Message Center outgoing  
message (Msg Ctr OGM) is the first step you  
need to follow before you can use the  
Message Center.  
a Press MENU.  
9
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
To enter Message Center mode, follow the  
steps below:  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Msg Ctr.  
a Record your Message Center OGM  
(Msg Ctr OGM). (See Outgoing  
e Press Setup Msg Ctr.  
f Press OGM.  
b Press  
to activate the Message  
The LCD prompts you to choose an  
OGM.  
Center.  
g Press either Msg Ctr OGMor  
F/T OGM.  
Note  
If callers tell you they cannot leave a  
message on your machine, make sure you  
have chosen Msg Ctr OGM(not  
F/T OGM).  
h Press Record OGM.  
81  
         
Chapter 9  
i Pick up the handset, record your  
message, and replace the handset  
when finished.  
i Do one of the following:  
Press Yesto erase the OGM.  
Press Noto exit without erasing.  
The Message Center will play your  
OGM back to you.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
Fax/Tel OGM  
(Announcement)  
Listening to your OGM  
a Press MENU.  
9
9
If your machine is in Fax/Tel Receive mode,  
your Brother machine will play this message  
to callers. Unlike the MC OGM, the caller will  
not be able to leave a message.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
To record your Fax/Tel OGM follow the  
on page 81 and choose F/T OGM(not  
Msg Ctr OGM).  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Msg Ctr.  
e Press Setup Msg Ctr.  
f Press OGM.  
If you need to review the steps for setting up  
the Fax/Tel receive mode, see Receive  
g Press Msg Ctr OGMor F/T OGM.  
Activating Message Center  
mode  
h Press Playing OGM.  
Adjust the volume by pressing  
9
or  
.
When the  
light glows, Message Center  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
mode is active. Press  
to enter MC mode.  
Erasing your OGM  
a Press MENU.  
9
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Msg Ctr.  
e Press Setup Msg Ctr.  
f Press OGM.  
g Press Msg Ctr OGMor F/T OGM.  
h Press Erase OGM.  
82  
     
Message Center  
Playing all incoming  
messages  
Managing your  
messages  
9
9
All messages are played in the order they  
were recorded. The LCD shows the number  
of the current message, the total number of  
messages, and the time and date the  
message was recorded.  
Message indicator  
9
The  
light on the control panel blinks if  
there are any new messages or unplayed  
recorded conversations stored in the  
Message Center. Press this button to start  
playing your new messages.  
Follow the steps below to listen to your voice  
messages:  
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
The LCD displays the total number of voice  
and fax messages stored in the  
Message Center memory.  
b Press ICM.  
c Press Play All.  
Fax messages are only stored when Fax  
Storage or Fax Preview is turned on. See  
The following commands are available  
when playing messages:  
Repeats a message.  
Playing incoming messages  
individually  
Skips to the next message.  
9
Adjusts the volume.  
or  
9
Incoming messages can be played  
individually. The LCD shows the list of  
incoming messages with the phone number  
of the caller, and the time and date the  
message was recorded.  
Erases the current message.  
Erase  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Follow the steps below to listen to your voice  
messages:  
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
b Press ICM.  
c Press a or b to display the message you  
want to listen to.  
d Press the message you want to listen to.  
The following commands are available  
when playing messages:  
Erases the current message.  
Adjusts the volume.  
Erase  
or  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
83  
       
Chapter 9  
Erasing incoming messages  
9
Playing recorded  
conversations individually  
9
To erase incoming messages  
individually  
Recorded conversations can be played  
individually. The LCD shows the list of  
recorded conversations with the phone  
number of the caller, and the time and date  
the message was recorded.  
9
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
b Press ICM.  
Follow the steps below to listen to your voice  
messages:  
c Press a or b to display the message you  
want to delete.  
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
d Press the message you want to delete.  
b Press Recorded Calls.  
e Press Erasewhile playing the  
message.  
c Press a or b to display the conversation  
you want to listen to.  
f Press Yesto confirm.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press the conversation you want to  
listen to.  
The following commands are available  
when playing messages:  
To erase all of your messages  
9
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
Erases the current message.  
Adjusts the volume.  
Erase  
b Press ICM.  
or  
c Press Erase All.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
d The LCD will ask you if you want to  
delete all messages.  
Press Yes.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Recording a conversation  
9
You can record a telephone conversation  
during the conversation. Your recording can  
be as long as the incoming message  
maximum time (up to 3 minutes). (See  
messages on page 86.) The other party will  
hear an intermittent beeping while recording.  
a Press Recordduring the conversation.  
b Press Stop/Exit to stop recording.  
84  
     
Message Center  
Playing all recorded  
conversations  
Erasing recorded  
conversations  
9
9
All recorded conversations are played in the  
order they were recorded. The LCD the total  
number of recorded calls and the time and  
date each call was recorded.  
To erase recorded conversations  
individually  
9
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
Follow the steps below to listen to all the  
recorded calls:  
b Press Recorded Calls.  
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
c Press a or b to display the recorded  
conversations you want to delete.  
b Press Recorded Calls.  
d Press Erasewhile playing the  
c Press Play All.  
conversations.  
The following commands are available  
when playing messages:  
e Press Yesto confirm.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Repeats a conversation.  
Skips to the next  
conversation.  
To erase all of your recorded  
conversations  
9
Adjusts the volume.  
or  
M e s s a g e  
a Press  
on the LCD.  
C e n t e r  
Erases the current  
conversation.  
9
Erase  
b Press Recorded Calls.  
c Press Erase All.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
d The LCD will ask you if you want to  
delete all recorded conversations.  
Press Yes.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
85  
   
Chapter 9  
Setting toll saver  
9
Additional Message  
Center operations  
9
When the toll saver feature is on, the machine  
will answer after two rings if you do have  
voice or fax messages, and after four rings if  
you do not have any messages.  
Setting the maximum time for  
incoming messages  
9
This way, when you call your machine for  
remote retrieval, if it rings three times, you  
have no messages and can hang up to avoid  
a toll charge.  
Your machine’s default setting will save  
incoming messages up to 30 seconds long.  
To change this setting follow the steps below:  
The toll saver feature is only available when  
Message Center mode is on. When toll saver  
is On, it overrides your ring delay setting.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
If you are using Distinctive Ring, do not use  
the toll saver feature.  
a Press MENU.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Msg Ctr.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
e Press Setup Msg Ctr.  
f Press ICM Max.Time.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Receive.  
g Press the maximum time setting for  
incoming messages (30, 60, 120or  
180seconds).  
e Press Setup Receive.  
f Press a or b to display Ring Delay.  
g Press Ring Delay.  
h Press Toll Saver.  
i Press On(or Off).  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
86  
       
Message Center  
ICM Recording Monitor  
9
This feature lets you turn the speaker volume  
for voice messages Onor Off. When you turn  
the monitor Off, you will not hear messages  
as they come in.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
d Press a or b to display  
Setup Msg Ctr.  
e Press Setup Msg Ctr.  
f Press ICM Rec.Monitr.  
g Press Offor On.  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
9
87  
 
Printing Reports  
10  
10  
d Press a or b to display  
Fax reports  
10  
Report Setting.  
You need to set up the Transmission  
Verification Report and Journal Period using  
the MENU button.  
e Press Report Setting.  
f Press Transmission.  
g Press On, On+Image, Off or  
Off+Image.  
Transmission Verification  
Report  
10  
h Press Stop/Exit.  
You can use the Transmission Verification  
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This  
report lists the receiving party’s name or fax  
number, the time and date of transmission,  
duration of transmission, number of pages  
sent, and whether or not the transmission  
was successful.  
Note  
• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image  
the image will only appear on the  
Transmission Verification Report if Real  
Time Transmission is set to Off. (See Real  
There are several settings available for the  
Transmission Verification Report:  
• If your transmission is successful, OK will  
appear next to RESULT on the  
Transmission Verification Report. If  
transmission is not successful, NG will  
appear next to RESULT.  
On: Prints a report after every fax you  
send.  
On+Image: Prints a report after every fax  
you send. A portion of the fax’s first page  
appears on the report.  
Fax Journal (activity report)  
10  
Off: Prints a report only if your fax is  
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.  
You can set the machine to print a journal at  
specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or  
24 hours, 2 or 7 days). If you set the interval  
to Off, you can still print the report by  
following the steps in How to print a report  
on page 89. The factory setting is  
The report will also print if you send a color  
fax that the receiving machine prints in  
black and white. Off is the default setting.  
Off+Image: Prints a report only if your  
fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission  
error. The report will also print if your fax is  
successful, but you sent a color fax that  
the receiving machine printed in black and  
white.  
Every 50 Faxes.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on  
the report.  
a Press MENU.  
d Press a or b to display  
Report Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Fax.  
c Press Fax.  
e Press Report Setting.  
f Press Journal Period.  
88  
       
Printing Reports  
g Press d or c to choose an interval.  
If you choose Every 50 Faxes, go to  
step i.  
Reports  
10  
The following reports are available:  
6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days  
Transmission  
The machine will print the report at  
the chosen time and then erase all  
jobs from its memory. If the  
Prints a Transmission Verification Report  
for your last transmission.  
Help List  
machine's memory becomes full with  
200 jobs before the time you chose  
has passed, the machine will print  
the Journal early and then erase all  
jobs from the memory. If you want an  
extra report before it is due to print,  
you can print it without erasing the  
jobs from the memory.  
A help list showing how to program your  
machine.  
Quick Dial  
Lists names and numbers stored in the  
Speed Dial memory, in alphabetical or  
numerical order.  
Every 50 Faxes  
Fax Journal  
The machine will print the Journal  
when the machine has stored  
50 jobs.  
Lists information about the last incoming  
and outgoing faxes. (TX: Transmit.)  
(RX: Receive.)  
User Settings  
h Enter the time to start printing in 24-hour  
format.  
Lists your settings.  
Press OK.  
Network Config  
Lists your Network settings.  
Caller ID hist.  
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)  
(If you choose 7 days, the LCD will ask  
you to choose the first day for the 7-day  
countdown.)  
10  
Lists the available Caller ID information  
about the last 30 received faxes and  
telephone calls.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
How to print a report  
10  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
Print Reports.  
c Press Print Reports.  
d Press the report you want.  
e (Quick Dial only) Press  
Alphabetical Orderor  
Numerical Order.  
f Press Black Start.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
89  
             
Polling  
11  
11  
Polling overview  
11  
Polling receive  
11  
Polling lets you set up your machine so other  
people can receive faxes from you, but they  
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody  
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,  
so you pay for the call. The polling feature  
needs to be set up on both machines for this  
Polling receive lets you call another fax  
machine to receive a fax.  
Setup to receive polling  
11  
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Press d or c to display Polling RX.  
c Press Polling RX.  
d Press On(or Off).  
e Enter the fax number you are polling  
using Speed Dialor the dial pad on  
the control panel.  
f Press Black Start or Color Start.  
The LCD shows Dialing.  
90  
       
Polling  
Sequential polling  
(Black & White only)  
Canceling a Sequential  
Polling Job  
11  
11  
Sequential polling lets you request  
documents from several fax machines in one  
operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling  
Report will be printed.  
a Press Stop/Exit.  
b Do one of the following:  
To cancel the entire sequential  
polling job, press  
a Press  
(Fax).  
Entire Seq. Poll.  
Go to step c.  
b Press d or c to display Polling RX.  
c Press Polling RX.  
To cancel the current job, press the  
button that displays the number  
being dialed.  
d Press On(or Off).  
Go to step d.  
To exit without canceling, press  
Stop/Exit.  
e Press d or c to display Broadcasting.  
f Press Broadcasting.  
c When the LCD asks if you want to  
cancel the entire sequential polling job,  
do one of the following:  
g Do one of the following:  
Press Add Numberand enter a  
number using the buttons on the  
LCD.  
Press Yesto confirm.  
To exit without canceling, press No  
or Stop/Exit.  
Press OK.  
#
01  
Press Speed Dial. Press  
to  
d Do one of the following:  
choose Alphabetical Order or  
Numerical Order. Press a or b to  
select a number.  
To cancel the current job, press Yes.  
To exit without canceling, press No  
or Stop/Exit.  
11  
Press OK.  
h After you have entered all the fax  
numbers by repeating step g, press OK.  
i Press Black Start.  
The machine polls each number or  
Group number in turn for a document.  
91  
         
Chapter 11  
Polled transmit  
(Black & White only)  
11  
Polled transmit lets you set up your machine  
to wait with a document so another fax  
machine can call and retrieve it.  
The document will be stored and can be  
retrieved by any other fax machine until you  
delete it from the memory. (See Checking  
Set up for polled transmit  
11  
a Press  
(Fax).  
b Load your document.  
c Press d or c to display Polled TX.  
d Press Polled TX.  
e Press On(or Off).  
f Press Black Start.  
g If you are using the scanner glass, the  
LCD will prompt you to choose one of  
the following options.  
Press Yesto scan another page.  
Go to step h.  
Press Noor Black Start to send the  
document.  
h Place the next page on the scanner  
glass and press Black Start. Repeat  
steps g and h for each additional  
page.  
Your machine will automatically send  
the fax.  
92  
       
Section III  
Copy  
III  
 
Making copies  
12  
12  
Page Layout(See page 96.)  
Book Copy(See page 100.)  
Watermark Copy(See page 100.)  
Favorite Settings(See page 101.)  
Press the option you want.  
How to copy  
12  
Entering Copy mode  
12  
When you want to make a copy, press  
(Copy) to illuminate it in blue.  
Note  
• The default setting is Fax mode. You can  
change the amount of time that the  
machine stays in Copy mode after the last  
copy operation. (See Mode Timer  
Book Copy, Watermark Copyand  
Ink Save Modefeatures are supported  
by technology from Reallusion, Inc.  
The LCD shows:  
1
F a v o r i t e  
C 0 P Y  
Making a single copy  
12  
X
E n l a r g e /  
R e d u c e  
1 0 0 %  
01  
Q u a l i t y  
N o r m a l  
P a p e r Ty p e  
P l a i n P a p e r  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
1
No. of Copies  
Press the number box directly and enter the  
number you want. Then press OK.  
c Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Also you can enter the number of copies by  
pressing  
or  
on the screen (as  
shown above) or by using the dial pad.  
Press d or c to scroll through the copy  
options. Press the option that you want to set.  
Quality(See page 95.)  
Enlarge/Reduce(See page 96.)  
Paper Type(See page 99.)  
Paper Size(See page 99.)  
Brightness(See page 98.)  
Contrast(See page 98.)  
Ink Save Mode(See page 99.)  
Stack/Sort(See page 98.)  
94  
       
Making copies  
Making multiple copies  
12  
Copy settings  
12  
You can make up to 99 copies in one print  
run.  
You can change the copy settings temporarily  
for the next copy.  
These settings are temporary, and the  
machine returns to its default settings  
1 minute after copying, unless you have set  
the Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less. (See  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
If you have finished choosing settings, press  
Black Start or Color Start.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
If you want to choose more settings, press  
d or c.  
Note  
To sort the copies, press d or c to choose  
Stack/Sort. (See Sorting copies using  
Note  
You can save some of the settings that  
you use most often by setting them as a  
favorite (up to three can be saved). These  
settings will stay until you change them  
Stop copying  
12  
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.  
Changing copy quality  
12  
You can choose from a range of quality. The  
factory setting is Normal.  
Fast  
Fast copy speed and lowest amount of ink  
used. Use to save time printing  
documents to be proof-read, large  
documents or many copies.  
12  
Even if you set this option the copy speed  
will be slower with Ink Save Mode,  
Book Copyor Watermark Copyturned  
on.  
Normal  
Normal is the recommended mode for  
ordinary printouts. This produces good  
copy quality with good copy speed.  
Best  
Use best mode to copy precise images  
such as photographs. This provides the  
highest resolution and slowest speed.  
95  
         
Chapter 12  
a Press  
(Copy).  
100%  
198% 4"x6" i A4  
186%4"x6" i LTR  
104% EXE i LTR  
97%LTR i A4  
93%A4 i LTR  
83%LGL i A4  
78% LGL i LTR  
46%LTR i 4"x6"  
Fit to Page  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display Quality.  
e Press Quality.  
f Press Fast, Normalor Best.  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Custom(25-400%)  
h If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Enlarging or reducing the  
image copied  
12  
Note  
You can choose an enlargement or reduction  
ratio. If you choose Fit to Page, your  
machine will adjust the size automatically to  
the paper size you set. If you want this  
setting, use the scanner glass.  
Page Layoutis not available with  
Enlarge/Reduce.  
Page Layout, Sort, Book Copyand  
Watermark Copyare not available with  
Fit to Page.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
Fit to Pagedoes not work properly  
when the document on the scanner glass  
is skewed more than 3 degrees. Using the  
document guidelines on the left and top,  
place your document in the upper left  
hand corner, with the document face down  
on the scanner glass.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display  
Enlarge/Reduce.  
e Press Enlarge/Reduce.  
f Press 100%, Enlarge, Reduce,  
Fit to Pageor Custom(25-400%).  
Making N in 1 copies or a  
poster (Page Layout)  
12  
g Do one of the following:  
The N in 1 copy feature can help you save  
paper by letting you copy two or four pages  
onto one printed page.  
If you chose Enlargeor Reduce,  
press the enlargement or reduction  
ratio you want.  
You can also produce a poster. When you  
use the poster feature your machine divides  
your document into sections, then enlarges  
the sections so you can assemble them into a  
poster. If you want to print a poster, use the  
scanner glass.  
If you chose Custom(25-400%),  
enter an enlargement or reduction  
ratio from 25%to 400%.  
Press OK.  
If you chose 100%or Fit to Page,  
go to step h.  
96  
         
Making copies  
j Place the next page on the scanner  
glass.  
Note  
Watermark Copy, Book Copy, Sort,  
Ink Save Modeand Enlarge/Reduce  
are not available with Page Layout.  
Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Repeat steps i and j for each page of  
the layout.  
k After all the pages have been scanned,  
press Noto finish.  
IMPORTANT  
• Make sure the paper size is set to Letter or  
A4.  
Note  
If photo paper has been chosen in the  
Paper Type setting for N in 1 copies, the  
machine will print the images as if Plain  
paper had been chosen.  
• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce  
setting with the N in 1 and Poster features.  
• If you are producing multiple color copies,  
N in 1 copy is not available.  
Place the document face down in the  
direction shown below:  
• You can only make one poster copy at a  
time.  
2 in 1 (P)  
(P)means Portrait and (L)means  
Landscape.  
2 in 1 (L)  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display Page Layout.  
e Press Page Layout.  
4 in 1 (P)  
4 in 1 (L)  
f Press d or c to display Off(1in1),  
2in1(P), 2in1(L), 4in1(P),  
12  
4in1(L)or Poster (3 x 3).  
Poster (3 x 3)  
g Press the setting of your choice.  
You can make a poster size copy of a  
photograph.  
h If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start to scan the page.  
If you placed the document in the ADF  
or are making a poster, the machine  
scans the pages and starts printing.  
If you are using the scanner glass, go  
to step i.  
i After the machine scans the page,  
press Yesto scan the next page.  
97  
   
Chapter 12  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Sorting copies using the ADF  
12  
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be  
stacked in the order 321, 321, 321, and so on.  
Contrast  
12  
a Press  
(Copy).  
You can adjust the copy contrast to help an  
image look sharper and more vivid.  
b Load your document.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display Stack/Sort.  
e Press Stack/Sort.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display Contrast.  
e Press Contrast.  
f Press Sort.  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
f Press c to increase the contrast or press  
d to decrease the contrast.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Fit to Page, Page Layoutand  
Book Copyare not available with Sort.  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Adjusting Brightness and  
Contrast  
12  
Brightness  
12  
You can adjust the copy brightness to make  
copies darker or lighter.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display Brightness.  
e Press Brightness.  
f Press d to make a darker copy or press  
c to make a lighter copy.  
Press OK.  
98  
           
Making copies  
g If you do not want to change any  
Ink Save Mode  
12  
additional settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Ink Save Mode can help you save some ink.  
Your machine detects the edges of the image  
and prints the outline of the image. The  
amount of ink saved will vary depending on  
the document.  
Note  
Watermark Copy, Book Copyor  
Page Layoutare not available with  
Ink Save Mode.  
Ink Save Mode: Off  
12  
Ink Save Modemay make your  
printouts look different from your original  
document.  
Paper Options  
12  
Paper Type  
12  
If you are copying on special paper, set the  
machine for the type of paper you are using to  
get the best print quality.  
Ink Save Mode: On  
12  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display Paper Type.  
e Press Paper Type.  
f Press Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,  
Brother BP71, Other Glossyor  
Transparency.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
12  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
Paper Size  
12  
d Press d or c to display  
Ink Save Mode.  
If copying on paper other than Letter size, you  
will need to change the paper size setting.  
You can copy only on Letter, Legal, A4, A5 or  
Photo 4 in. × 6 in. (10 cm × 15 cm) paper.  
e Press Ink Save Mode.  
f Press On(or Off).  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Load your document.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
99  
             
Chapter 12  
d Press d or c to display Paper Size.  
e Press Paper Size.  
Watermark Copy  
12  
You can place a logo or text into your  
document as a Watermark. You can select  
one of the template watermarks, data from  
your media cards or USB Flash memory  
drive, or scanned data.  
f Press Letter, Legal, A4, A5or  
4"x6".  
g If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Note  
Fit to Page, Page Layout,  
Ink Save Modeand Book Copyare  
not available with Watermark Copy.  
Book Copy  
12  
Book copy corrects dark borders and skew  
when copying from the scanner glass. Your  
machine can correct the data automatically or  
you can make specific corrections.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Press d or c to display  
Watermark Copy.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
c Press Watermark Copy.  
b Load your document.  
d Press Use Watermark.  
c Enter the number of copies you want.  
d Press d or c to display Book Copy.  
e Press Book Copy.  
Do one of the following:  
If you want to use a template from  
the machine, press  
Edit Templateand go to step e.  
If you want to use your own data as a  
watermark, press Use Imageand  
go to step f.  
f Do one of the following:  
If you want to correct the data  
yourself, press On(Preview).  
e Press Textand choose the data you  
want to use, CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFTor  
COPY. Press OK.  
Press Black Start or Color Start  
and go to step g.  
If you want the machine to correct  
the data automatically, press Onand  
go to step h.  
Change other watermark settings from  
the available options as needed.  
Press OK.  
Go to step g.  
g Adjust the skewed data using  
or  
.
Remove the shadows by using d or c.  
h If you have finished making corrections,  
press Black Start or Color Start.  
Note  
Page Layout, Sort, Ink Save Mode,  
Fit to Pageand Watermark Copy  
are not available with Book Copy.  
100  
             
Making copies  
f Do one of the following:  
i If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
If you want to use a document as the  
watermark, press Scan.  
Place the document that you want to  
use for the watermark on the scanner  
glass and press Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Setting your favorites  
12  
You can store the copy settings that you use  
most often by setting them as a favorite. You  
can set up to three favorites.  
The scanned data will be displayed  
on the LCD.  
If you want to adjust the degree of  
Transparency for your scanned data,  
press Transparency.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Choose the copy option and settings  
Press d or c to adjust the degree,  
you want to store.  
and then press OK.  
c Press d or c to display  
Favorite Settings.  
Press OKagain.  
Go to step g.  
d Press Favorite Settings.  
e Press Store.  
If you want to use data from a media  
card or USB Flash memory drive as  
the watermark, insert the media card  
or USB flash memory drive.  
Note  
After Photo Capture stops blinking,  
press Media.  
Set Watermark Copyto Offor  
Templatewhen storing  
Favorite Settings.  
The image will be shown on the LCD.  
Press the image you want to use for  
the watermark.  
f Press the location where you want to  
store your settings for Favorite:1,  
Favorite:2or Favorite:3.  
You can adjust the Position, Size,  
Angle and Transparency of the  
watermark. Press OK.  
g Do one of the following:  
Go to step g.  
If you want to rename your setting,  
12  
press  
to delete characters. Then  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT take out the memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive while  
enter the new name (up to  
12 characters).  
Press OK. (See Entering Text  
Photo Capture is blinking to avoid  
damaging the card, USB Flash memory  
drive or the data stored on them.  
If you do not want to rename your  
setting, press OK.  
g Press OKto confirm to use watermark.  
Load the document you want to copy.  
h Enter the number of copies you want.  
101  
       
Chapter 12  
Retrieving your favorite setting  
12  
‘Out of Memory’  
message  
When you are ready to use one of your  
favorite set of settings, you can recall it.  
12  
If the Out of Memorymessage appears  
a Press  
(Copy).  
while scanning document, press Stop/Exit to  
cancel or Black Start or Color Start to copy  
the scanned pages.  
b Press Favorite.  
You will need to clear some jobs from the  
memory before you can continue.  
c Press the favorite setting you want to  
retrieve.  
To free up extra memory, do the following:  
Rename your favorite setting  
12  
Turn off Memory Receive. (See Memory  
After you stored your favorite setting, you can  
rename it.  
Print the faxes that are in the memory.  
a Press  
(Copy).  
b Press d or c to display  
Favorite Settings.  
When you get an Out of Memory  
message, you may be able to make copies if  
you first print incoming faxes in the memory to  
restore the memory to 100%.  
c Press Favorite Settings.  
d Press Rename.  
e Press the favorite setting you want to  
rename.  
f Enter the new name (up to  
12 characters). (See Entering Text  
g Press OK.  
102  
 
Section IV  
Direct Printing  
IV  
®
PhotoCapture Center : Printing photos from  
a memory card or USB Flash memory drive 104  
 
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing  
photos from a memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive  
13  
13  
PhotoCapture Center®  
Operations  
Using a memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive  
13  
13  
Your Brother machine has media drives  
(slots) for use with the following popular  
digital camera media: CompactFlash®,  
Memory Stick™, Memory Stick PRO™, SD,  
SDHC, xD-Picture Card™ and USB Flash  
memory drives.  
Printing from a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive  
without a PC  
13  
Even if your machine is not connected to your  
computer, you can print photos directly from  
digital camera media or a USB Flash memory  
CompactFlash®  
Memory Stick™  
Scanning to a memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive  
Memory Stick PRO™  
without a PC  
13  
You can scan documents and save them  
directly to a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive. (See Scan to a memory card  
SD, SDHC  
xD-Picture Card™  
0.87 in.(22 mm)  
or less  
®
Using PhotoCapture Center  
0.43 in. (11 mm)  
or less  
from your computer  
13  
USB Flash memory  
drive  
You can access a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive that is inserted in the front of  
the machine from your computer.  
miniSD can be used with a miniSD  
adapter.  
(See PhotoCapture Center® for Windows® or  
microSD can be used with a microSD  
Remote Setup & PhotoCapture Center® for  
Macintosh in the Software User's Guide on  
the CD-ROM.)  
adapter.  
Memory Stick Duo™ can be used with a  
Memory Stick Duo™ adapter.  
Memory Stick PRO Duo™ can be used  
with a Memory Stick PRO Duo™ adapter.  
Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™) can be used  
with a Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™)  
adapter.  
104  
           
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Adapters are not included with the  
Please be aware of the following:  
machine. Contact a third party supplier for  
adapters.  
When printing an index or image, the  
PhotoCapture Center® will print all valid  
images, even if one or more images have  
been corrupted. Corrupted images will not  
be printed.  
This product supports xD-Picture Card™  
Type M / Type M+ / Type H (Large  
Capacity).  
IBM Microdrive™ is not compatible with  
(memory card users)  
the machine.  
Your machine is designed to read memory  
cards that have been formatted by a digital  
camera.  
CompactFlash® Type II is not supported.  
The PhotoCapture Center® feature lets you  
print digital photos from your digital camera at  
high resolution to get photo quality printing.  
When a digital camera formats a memory  
card it creates a special folder into which it  
copies image data. If you need to modify  
the image data stored on a memory card  
with your PC, we recommend that you do  
not modify the folder structure created by  
the digital camera. When saving new or  
modified image files to the memory card  
we also recommend you use the same  
folder your digital camera uses. If the data  
is not saved to the same folder, the  
machine may not be able to read the file or  
print the image.  
Memory cards, USB Flash  
memory drive and folder  
structure  
13  
Your machine is designed to be compatible  
with modern digital camera image files,  
memory cards and USB Flash memory drive;  
however, please read the points below to  
avoid errors:  
(USB Flash memory drive users)  
The image file extension must be .JPG  
(other image file extensions like .JPEG,  
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be  
recognized).  
This machine supports USB Flash  
memory drives that have been formatted  
by Windows®.  
Direct PhotoCapture Center® printing  
must be performed separately from  
PhotoCapture Center® operations using  
the PC. (Simultaneous operation is not  
available.)  
The machine can read up to 999 files on a  
13  
memory card or USB Flash memory drive.  
The DPOF file on the memory cards must  
be in a valid DPOF format. (See DPOF  
105  
 
Chapter 13  
Photo Capture key lights:  
Getting started  
13  
Firmly put a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive into the proper slot.  
Photo Capture light is on, the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive is  
properly inserted.  
4 5  
1
2
3
Photo Capture light is off, the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive is not  
properly inserted.  
1
USB Flash memory drive  
2
3
4
5
CompactFlash®  
SD, SDHC  
Photo Capture light is blinking, memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive is being  
read or written to.  
Memory Stick™, Memory Stick PRO™  
xD-Picture Card™  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
The USB direct interface supports only a  
USB Flash memory drive, a PictBridge  
compatible camera, or a digital camera  
that uses the USB mass storage standard.  
Any other USB devices are not supported.  
DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove  
the media from the media drive (slot) or  
USB direct interface while the machine is  
reading or writing to the media (the  
Photo Capture key is blinking). You will  
lose your data or damage the card.  
The machine can only read one memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive at a time so do  
not put more than one device in the machine  
at a time.  
106  
 
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Entering PhotoCapture mode  
13  
Print Images  
13  
After you insert the memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive, the LCD displays the  
PhotoCapture options.  
View Photos  
13  
You can preview your photos on the LCD  
before you print them. If your photos are large  
files there may be a delay before each photo  
is displayed on the LCD.  
The LCD shows:  
PhotoCapture  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
View  
Photos  
Enhance  
Photos  
Index  
Print  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
Press View Photosif you want to  
quickly view and print your photos. See  
b Press View Photos.  
Do one of the following:  
Press Enhance Photosif you want to  
add special effects to your photos. See  
If you want to choose photos to print  
or print more than one for an image,  
go to step c.  
Press Index Printif you want to print  
If you want to print all photos,  
an Index page (Thumbnails). You can also  
print photos using the image numbers of  
the Index page (Thumbnails). See Print  
press  
.
Press Yesto confirm.  
Go to step f.  
Note  
Note  
If your digital camera supports DPOF  
• Eight thumbnails are displayed at a time  
with the current page number and total  
number of pages listed under the  
thumbnails.  
Press the option you want to set.  
• Press d or c repeatedly to scroll through  
all photos. Hold down d or c to  
fast-forward and fast-rewind through the  
thumbnail pages.  
13  
• Press  
to start Slide Show.  
c Press a photo from the thumbnail.  
d Enter the number of copies you want  
either by pressing the number box  
directly and enter the number you want  
or pressing + or -.  
Press OK.  
107  
             
Chapter 13  
e Repeat steps c and d until you have  
chosen all the photos that you want to  
print.  
b Press Index Print.  
c Press Index Sheetand choose  
6 Images/Lineor 5 Images/Line.  
f After you have chosen all the photos,  
press OK. You now have the following  
options:  
To add the Auto Correcteffect to  
your chosen photos, press  
.
6 Images/Line 5 Images/Line  
If you want to change the print  
Print time for 5 Images/Linewill be  
slower than 6 Images/Line, but the  
quality is better.  
settings, press Print Setting.  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
d Do one of the following:  
Press Print Settingto change  
the paper type or the paper size you  
are using.  
Print Index (Thumbnails)  
13  
The PhotoCapture Center® assigns numbers  
for images (such as No.1, No.2, No.3, and so  
on).  
If you do not want to change the  
paper settings, go to step g.  
e Press Paper Type.  
Choose the paper type you are using,  
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,  
Brother BP71or Other Glossy.  
f Press Paper Size.  
Choose the paper size you are using,  
Letteror A4.  
The PhotoCapture Center® does not  
recognize any other numbers or file names  
that your digital camera or computer has  
used to identify the pictures. You can print a  
g Press Color Start to print.  
thumbnail page. This will show all the pictures  
on the memory card or USB Flash memory  
drive.  
Note  
Only file names that are 8 characters or  
less will be printed correctly on the index  
sheet.  
a Make sure you have put the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
108  
       
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Printing Photos  
13  
Enhance Photos  
13  
Before you can print an individual image, you  
have to know the image number.  
You can edit and add effects to your photos  
and view them on the LCD before printing.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
Note  
The Enhance Photos feature is supported  
by technology from Reallusion, Inc.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
b Print the Index. (See Print Index  
a Make sure you have put the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive in the  
correct slot.  
c Press Index Print.  
d Press Print Photos.  
Press  
(Photo Capture).  
b Press Enhance Photos.  
e Enter the image number that you want to  
print from the Index page (Thumbnails).  
After you have chosen the image  
numbers, press OK.  
Note  
• Press d or c to scroll through all photos.  
You can forward and rewind the  
Note  
thumbnails by holding these keys. The  
photo is not shown during this operation.  
• You can enter multiple numbers at one  
time by using a comma or a hyphen. For  
example, Enter 1, 3, 6 to print images  
No.1, No.3 and No.6. Enter 1-5 to print  
images No.1 to No.5.  
• Eight thumbnails are displayed at a time  
with the current page number and total  
number of pages listed under the  
thumbnails.  
• You can enter up to 12 characters  
(including commas) for the image  
numbers you want to print.  
• Press  
to start Slide Show.  
c Press a photo from the thumbnails.  
f Enter the number of copies you want  
either by pressing the number box  
directly and enter the number you want  
or pressing + or -.  
d Press Enhanceor Trim. You can also  
choose both together. Press OK.  
e Do one of the following:  
13  
g Do one of the following:  
If you chose Enhance, go to step f.  
Press Print Settingto change  
If you chose Trim, go to step g.  
the print settings. (See page 112.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
109  
     
Chapter 13  
f Press the effect you wish to add.  
Press OK.  
• After adding each effect, you can enlarge  
the view of the image by pressing  
go back to the original size, press  
. To  
.
Go to step h.  
Note  
• While the image is enlarged, you can  
move around the image with up ( ),  
down ( ), left ( ) and right ( ).  
• You have 7 ways to add effects to your  
photo.  
• Press Cancelto return to the list of  
Auto Correct  
effects.  
The machine decides the appropriate  
effect for your photo.  
g Adjust the red frame around your photo.  
The part inside of the red frame will be  
printed.  
Enhance Skin  
Best used for adjusting portrait  
photographs. It adjusts human skin  
color. Press d or c to adjust the level of  
contrast.  
Press + or - to enlarge or reduce the  
frame size.  
Press a, b, d or c to move the  
Remove Red-Eye  
position of the frame.  
The machine will attempt to remove  
red-eye from your photo. If red-eye  
detection fails, you can press the  
Try Againbutton to re-detect.  
Press  
to rotate the frame.  
Press OKwhen you have finished  
adjusting the frame setting.  
Press OKto confirm.  
Enhance Scenery  
Best used for adjusting landscape  
photographs. It highlights green and  
blue areas in your photo. Press d or c  
to adjust the level of contrast.  
Note  
If your photo is very small or has irregular  
proportions you may not be able to trim  
the photo. The LCD will display  
Image Too Small.or  
Monochrome  
You can convert the color of your  
photo to monochrome.  
Image Too Long.  
Sepia  
h Enter the number of copies you want  
either by pressing the number box  
directly and enter the number you want  
or pressing + or -.  
Adds a sepia tone (shades of brown)  
effect to your photo.  
Auto Correct &  
Remove Red-Eye  
Press OK.  
The machine decides the suitable  
effects for your photo. Also, it will  
attempt to remove red-eye from your  
photo.  
i Do one of the following:  
Press Print Settingand change  
the print settings. (See page 112.)  
• There are some cases when red-eye may  
not be removed.  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
• When the face is too small in the  
image.  
• When the face is turning too far up,  
down, left or right.  
110  
     
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
DPOF printing  
13  
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.  
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon  
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM  
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and  
Sony Corporation) created this standard to  
make it easier to print images from a digital  
camera.  
If your digital camera supports DPOF  
printing, you will be able to choose on the  
digital camera display the images and  
number of copies you want to print.  
When a memory card (CompactFlash®,  
Memory Stick™, Memory Stick PRO™, SD,  
SDHC or xD-Picture Card™) containing  
DPOF information is put into your machine,  
you can print the chosen image easily.  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
in the proper slot.  
The machine will ask you if you want to  
use DPOF setting.  
b Press Yes.  
c Do one of the following:  
Press Print Settingto change  
the print settings. (See page 112.)  
If you do not want to change any  
settings, press Color Start to print.  
Note  
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the  
print order that was created on the camera  
has been corrupted. Delete and recreate  
the print order using your camera to  
correct this problem. For instructions on  
how to delete or recreate the print order,  
refer to your camera manufacturer's  
support website or accompanying  
documentation.  
13  
111  
   
Chapter 13  
PhotoCapture Center® print settings  
13  
You can change the print settings temporarily for the next printing.  
These settings are temporary, and the machine returns to its default settings 3 minutes after  
printing, unless you have set the Mode Timer to 2 minutes or less. (See Mode Timer on page 23.)  
Note  
You can save the print settings you use most often by setting them as the default. (See Setting  
P r i n t S e t t i n g  
P r i n t Q u a l i t y  
P a p e r Ty p e  
P a p e r S i z e  
B r i g h t n e s s  
P h o t o  
O t h e r G l o s s y  
4 " x 6 "  
0
Print Quality  
13  
Paper options  
13  
a Press Print Setting.  
Paper Type  
13  
b Press a or b to display  
Print Quality.  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Paper Type.  
c Press Paper Type.  
c Press Print Quality.  
d Press Normalor Photo.  
d Press the paper type you are using,  
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,  
e If you do not want to change additional  
Brother BP71or Other Glossy.  
settings, press  
.
Press Color Start to print.  
e If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press  
.
Press Color Start to print.  
112  
       
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Paper and print size  
13  
Adjusting Brightness,  
Contrast and Color  
13  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Paper Size.  
c Press Paper Size.  
Brightness  
13  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Brightness.  
c Press Brightness.  
d Press the paper size you are using,  
4"x 6", 5"x 7", Letteror A4.  
Do one of the following:  
If you chose Letter or A4, go to  
step e.  
d Press d to make a darker print or press  
c to make a lighter print.  
Press OK.  
If you chose another size of paper,  
go to step f.  
e If you do not want to change additional  
e Press the Print Size.  
settings, press  
.
Press Color Start to print.  
Example: Printed Position for Letter paper  
1
2
3
Contrast  
13  
3"x 4"  
3.5"x 5"  
4"x 6"  
You can choose the contrast setting. More  
contrast will make an image look sharper and  
more vivid.  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Contrast.  
c Press Contrast.  
4
5
6
Max. Size  
5"x 7"  
6"x 8"  
d Press c to increase the contrast or press  
d to decrease the contrast.  
Press OK.  
e If you do not want to change additional  
13  
settings, press  
.
f If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press  
Press Color Start to print.  
Press Color Start to print.  
.
113  
           
Chapter 13  
Color Enhancement (True2Life®)  
13  
Note  
White Balance  
You can turn on the color enhancement  
(True2Life®) feature to print more vivid  
This setting adjusts the hue of the white  
areas of an image. Lighting, camera  
settings and other influences will affect the  
appearance of white. The white areas of a  
picture may be slightly pink, yellow or  
some other color. By using this setting,  
you can correct that effect and bring the  
white areas back to pure white.  
images. Printing time will be slower.  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display True2Life.  
c Press True2Life.  
d Do one of the following:  
Sharpness  
If you want to customize the White  
Balance, Sharpness or Color  
Density, press On, and then go to  
step e.  
This setting enhances the detail of an  
image, similar to adjusting the fine focus  
on a camera. If the image is not in true  
focus and you cannot see the fine details  
of the picture, then adjust the sharpness.  
If you do not want to customize,  
press Off.  
Color Density  
Go to step h.  
This setting adjusts the total amount of  
color in the image. You can increase or  
decrease the amount of color in an image  
to improve a washed out or weak picture.  
e Press White Balance, Sharpnessor  
Color Density.  
f Press d or c to adjust the degree of the  
setting.  
Press OK.  
g Do one of the following:  
If you want to customize another  
color enhancement, repeat steps e  
to f.  
If you want to change other settings,  
press  
to display the print setting  
menu and press the setting you want  
to change. (See page 112.)  
h If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press  
.
Press Color Start to print.  
114  
       
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
Cropping  
13  
Borderless printing  
13  
If your photo is too long or wide to fit the  
available space on your chosen layout, part  
of the image will automatically be cropped.  
This feature expands the printable area to the  
edges of the paper. Printing time will be  
slightly slower.  
The factory setting is On. If you want to print  
the whole image, turn this setting to Off.  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Borderless.  
c Press Borderless.  
If you are also using the Borderless setting,  
turn the Borderless to Off. (See Borderless  
d Press Off(or On).  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Cropping.  
c Press Cropping.  
e If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press  
Press Color Start to print.  
.
d Press Off(or On).  
Print Date  
13  
e If you do not want to change additional  
You can print the date if it is already in the  
data on your photo. The date will be printed  
on the lower right corner. If the data doesn’t  
have the date information, you cannot use  
this function.  
settings, press  
Press Color Start to print.  
.
Cropping: On  
13  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display Print Date.  
c Press Print Date.  
On Off  
Cropping: Off  
13  
d Press  
(or  
).  
e If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press  
.
Press Color Start to print.  
13  
Note  
The DPOF setting on your camera must  
be turned off to use the Print Date.  
115  
       
Chapter 13  
Setting your changes as the  
new default  
Scan to a memory card  
or USB Flash memory  
drive  
13  
You can save the print settings you use most  
often by setting them as the default settings.  
These settings will stay until you change  
them again.  
13  
Entering Scan mode  
13  
a Choose the print settings and options  
When you want to scan to a memory card or  
you want to store.  
USB Flash memory drive, press  
The LCD shows:  
(Scan).  
b After changing the last setting, press  
a or b to choose Set New Default.  
SCAN  
c Press Set New Default.  
d Press Yesto confirm.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
S c a n t o  
E - m a i l  
S c a n t o  
I m a g e  
S c a n t o  
O C R  
S c a n t o  
F i l e  
S c a n t o  
M e d i a  
Press Scan to Media.  
Restoring all settings to the  
factory settings  
If you are not connected to your computer  
only the Scan to Media selection is available  
on the LCD.  
13  
You can restore all the settings you have  
changed to the factory settings. These  
settings will stay until you change them again.  
(See Using the Scan key for Windows® or  
Macintosh in the Software User’s Guide on  
the CD-ROM for details about the other menu  
options.)  
a Press Print Setting.  
b Press a or b to display  
Factory Reset.  
c Press Factory Reset.  
d Press Yesto confirm.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
116  
           
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
e Do one of the following:  
How to scan to a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive  
To change the quality, press d or c to  
display Quality.  
13  
Press Qualityand choose  
Color 150 dpi,  
Color 300 dpi,  
Color 600 dpi,  
B/W 200x100 dpior  
B/W 200 dpi.  
You can scan black & white and color  
documents into a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive. Black & white documents will  
be stored in PDF (*.PDF) or TIFF (*.TIF) file  
formats. Color documents may be stored in  
PDF (*.PDF) or JPEG (*.JPG) file formats.  
The factory setting is Color 150 dpiand  
the default file format is PDF. The machine  
automatically creates file names based on  
the current date. (For details, see the Quick  
Setup Guide.) For example, the fifth image  
scanned on July 1, 2009 would be named  
07010905.PDF. You can change the color  
and quality.  
To change the file type, press d or c  
to display File Type.  
Press File Typeand choose PDF,  
JPEGor TIFF.  
If you want to change the file name,  
press d or c to display File Name.  
Press File Nameand enter the file  
name.  
You can only change the first  
6 characters.  
Quality  
Selectable File  
Format  
Color 150 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
JPEG/ PDF  
JPEG/ PDF  
JPEG/ PDF  
Press OK.  
Press Black Start or Color Start to  
start scanning without changing  
additional settings.  
B/W 200x100 dpi TIFF/ PDF  
B/W 200 dpi TIFF/ PDF  
Note  
• If you chose color in the resolution setting,  
a Make sure you have put the memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
you cannot choose TIFF.  
• If you chose black & white in the resolution  
setting, you cannot choose JPEG.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT take out the memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive while  
f Press Black Start or Color Start.  
Photo Capture is blinking to avoid  
damaging the card, USB Flash memory  
drive or data stored on them.  
13  
b Load your document.  
c Press  
(Scan).  
d Press Scan to Media.  
117  
 
Chapter 13  
f Press Auto Crop.  
g Press On.  
Auto Crop  
13  
You can scan multiple documents placed on  
the scanner glass. An individual document  
can be previewed on the LCD before you  
save it. When you choose Auto Crop, the  
machine will scan each document and create  
h If you do not want to change additional  
settings, press Black Start or  
Color Start to start scanning.  
separate files. For example, if you place three  
documents on the scanner glass, the  
i The number of the scanned documents  
appear on the LCD.  
machine will scan and create three separate  
files. If you want to create a three page file,  
choose PDFor TIFFfor File Type. If you  
use this setting, use the scanner glass.  
Press OK.  
j Press d or c to preview each document  
data.  
Press Save Allto save the data.  
1
Note  
Auto Cropis available for paper that has  
all four corners with right angles of  
90 degrees. If one of the angles is not  
square, Auto Crop cannot detect the  
document.  
1
1
3
• If your document is too long or wide, this  
setting does not work properly.  
2
3
• You must place the documents away from  
the edges of the scanner glass as shown  
in the illustration.  
2
• You must place the documents at least  
0.4 in. (10 mm) away from each other.  
1
2
0.4 in. (10 mm) or greater (top, left, right)  
0.8 in. (20 mm) or greater (bottom)  
Auto Cropadjusts the skew of the  
document on the scanner glass, but if your  
document is skewed more than  
Note  
Auto Cropis supported by technology  
10 degrees, this setting will not work.  
• The ADF must be empty to use the Auto  
Crop.  
from Reallusion, Inc.  
• The Auto Cropfeature is available for up  
to a maximum of 16 documents  
a Make sure you have put a memory card  
or USB Flash memory drive in the  
proper slot.  
depending on size of your documents.  
b Load your document.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT take out the memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive while  
c Press  
(Scan).  
Photo Capture is blinking to avoid  
damaging the card, USB Flash memory  
drive or data stored on them.  
d Press Scan to Media.  
e Press d or c to choose Auto Crop.  
118  
 
PhotoCapture Center®: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
How to set a new default  
13  
Understanding the  
Error Messages  
13  
You can save the Scan to Media settings  
(Quality, File Type, and Auto Crop)  
you use most often by setting them as the  
default settings. These settings will stay until  
you change them again.  
Once you are familiar with the types of errors  
that can occur while you are using  
PhotoCapture Center®, you can easily  
identify and troubleshoot any problems.  
a Press  
(Scan).  
Hub is Unusable.  
This message will appear if a Hub or USB  
Flash memory drive with a Hub has been  
put into the USB direct interface.  
b Press Scan to Media.  
c Press d or c to display  
Set New Default.  
Media Error  
This message will appear if you put in a  
memory card that is either bad or not  
formatted, or when there is a problem with  
the media drive. To clear this error, take  
out the memory card.  
d Press Set New Default.  
e Press Yesto confirm.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
No File  
How to reset to the factory  
settings  
This message will appear if you try to  
access a memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive in the drive (slot) that does  
not contain a .JPG file.  
13  
You can restore all the settings you have  
changed to the factory settings.  
Out of Memory  
This message will appear if you are  
working with images that are too large for  
the machine's memory. This message will  
also appear when a memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive you are using does  
not have enough space available for the  
scanned document.  
a Press  
(Scan).  
b Press Scan to Media.  
c Press d or c to choose  
Factory Reset.  
d Press Factory Reset.  
e Press Yesto confirm.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Media is Full.  
13  
This message will appear if you are trying  
to save more than 999 files in a memory  
card or USB Flash memory drive.  
Unusable Device  
This message will appear if a USB device  
or USB Flash memory drive that is not  
supported has been connected to the USB  
direct interface. For more information, visit  
message will also appear if you connect a  
broken device to the USB direct interface.  
119  
     
Printing photos from a camera  
14  
14  
Setting your digital camera  
14  
Printing photos  
directly from a  
PictBridge camera  
Make sure your camera is in PictBridge  
mode. The following PictBridge settings may  
be available from the LCD of your PictBridge  
compatible camera.  
14  
Depending on your camera some of these  
settings may not be available.  
Camera Menu Options  
Selections  
Your Brother machine supports the  
PictBridge standard, allowing you to connect  
to and print photos directly from any  
PictBridge compatible digital camera.  
Paper Size  
Letter, A4, 4"×6", Printer  
Settings (Default setting) 2  
Paper Type  
Plain Paper, Glossy Paper,  
Inkjet Paper, Printer Settings  
If your camera is using the USB Mass  
Storage standard, you can also print photos  
from a digital camera without PictBridge.  
(Default setting) 2  
Layout  
Borderless: On,  
Borderless: Off,  
Printer Settings (Default  
setting) 2  
DPOF setting 1  
Print Quality  
-
PictBridge requirements  
14  
Normal, Fine,  
To avoid errors, remember the following  
points:  
Printer Settings (Default  
setting) 2  
The machine and the digital camera must  
Color  
Enhancement  
On, Off,  
be connected using a suitable USB cable.  
Printer Settings (Default  
setting) 2  
The image file extension must be .JPG  
(other image file extensions like .JPEG,  
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be  
recognized).  
Print Date  
On, Off,  
Printer Settings (Default  
setting) 2  
PhotoCapture Center® operations are not  
available when using the PictBridge  
feature.  
1
2
See DPOF printing on page 122 for more details.  
If your camera is set to use the Printer Settings  
(Default setting), the machine will print your photo  
using the following settings.  
120  
             
Printing photos from a camera  
Printing Images  
14  
Settings  
Options  
4"×6"  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Layout  
Note  
Glossy Paper  
Borderless: On  
Fine  
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash  
memory drive from the machine before  
connecting a digital camera.  
Print Quality  
Color Enhancement  
Print Date  
Off  
a Make sure that your camera is turned  
off. Connect your camera to the USB  
direct interface (1) on the machine using  
a USB cable.  
Off  
When your camera does not have any  
menu selections, these settings are also  
used.  
The names and availability of each setting  
depends on the specification of your  
camera.  
Please refer to the documentation supplied  
with your camera for more detailed  
information on changing PictBridge settings.  
1
1
USB direct interface  
b Turn on the camera.  
When the machine has recognized the  
camera, the LCD shows  
Camera Connected.  
c Choose the photo you want to print  
following the instructions from your  
camera.  
When the machine starts printing a  
photo, the LCD will show Printing.  
IMPORTANT  
To prevent damage to your machine, do  
14  
not connect any device other than a digital  
camera or USB Flash memory drive to the  
USB direct interface.  
121  
 
Chapter 14  
DPOF printing  
14  
Printing photos  
directly from a digital  
camera  
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.  
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon  
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM  
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and  
Sony Corporation) created this standard to  
make it easier to print images from a digital  
camera.  
(without PictBridge)  
14  
If your camera is using the USB Mass  
Storage standard, you can connect your  
camera in storage mode. This enables you to  
print photos from your camera.  
If your digital camera supports DPOF  
printing, you will be able to choose on the  
digital camera display the images and  
number of copies you want to print.  
(If you would like to print photos in PictBridge  
Note  
Note  
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the  
print order that was created on the camera  
has been corrupted. Delete and recreate  
the print order using your camera to  
correct this problem. For instructions on  
how to delete or recreate the print order,  
refer to your camera manufacturer's  
support website or accompanying  
documentation.  
The name, availability and operation differ  
among digital cameras. Please refer to the  
documentation supplied with your camera  
for detailed information, such as how to  
switch from PictBridge mode to USB mass  
storage mode.  
122  
       
Printing photos from a camera  
Printing Images  
14  
Understanding the  
Error Messages  
14  
Note  
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash  
memory drive from the machine before  
connecting a digital camera.  
Once you are familiar with the types of errors  
that can occur while you are printing from a  
camera, you can easily identify and  
troubleshoot any problems.  
a Make sure that your camera is turned  
off. Connect your camera to the USB  
direct interface (1) on the machine using  
the USB cable.  
Out of Memory  
This message will appear if you are  
working with images that are too large for  
the machine's memory.  
Unusable Device  
This message will appear if you connect a  
camera that is not using the USB Mass  
Storage standard. This message will also  
appear if you connect a broken device to  
the USB direct interface.  
(For more detailed solutions see Error and  
1
1
USB direct interface  
b Turn on the camera.  
c Follow the steps in Print Images  
IMPORTANT  
To prevent damage to your machine, do  
not connect any device other than a digital  
camera or USB Flash memory drive to the  
USB direct interface.  
14  
123  
   
Chapter 14  
124  
Section V  
Software  
V
 
Software and Network features  
15  
15  
The CD-ROM includes the Software User’s  
Guide and Network User’s Guide for features  
available when connected to a computer (for  
example, printing and scanning). These  
guides have easy to use links that, when  
clicked, will take you directly to a particular  
section.  
c Click the heading you would like to view  
from the list at the left of the window.  
You can find information on these features:  
Printing  
Scanning  
ControlCenter3 (Windows®)  
ControlCenter2 (Macintosh)  
Remote Setup  
Faxing from your computer  
PhotoCapture Center®  
Network Printing  
Network Scanning  
Macintosh  
Wired and Wireless Network  
How to read HTML User’s Guide  
This is a quick reference for using the HTML  
User’s Guide.  
a Make sure your Macintosh is turned on.  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your  
CD-ROM drive.  
b Double-click the Documentation icon.  
Windows®  
c Double-click your language folder, and  
then double-click the top.html.  
Note  
If you have not installed the software, see  
d Click SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE (or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) in the Top  
Menu, and then click the heading you  
would like to read from the list at the left  
of the window.  
a From the Start menu, point to Brother,  
MFC-XXXX (where XXXX is your model  
number) from the programs group, then  
click User’s Guides in HTML format.  
b Click SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE (or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) from the  
Top Menu.  
126  
 
Safety and Legal  
A
A
Choosing a location  
A
Put your machine on a flat, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk. Put  
the machine near a telephone wall jack and a standard AC power outlet. Choose a location where  
the temperature remains between 50 °F and 95 °F (10 °C and 35 °C).  
WARNING  
DO NOT put the machine near heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, medical equipment,  
chemicals or water.  
DO NOT connect your machine to AC power outlets on the same circuit as large appliances or  
other equipment that might disrupt the power supply.  
CAUTION  
• Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area.  
• Avoid placing your machine on a carpet.  
• DO NOT expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat, moisture, or dust.  
• DO NOT connect your machine to AC power outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic  
timers.  
• Disruption of power can wipe out information in the machine's memory.  
• Avoid interference sources, such as speakers or the base units of non-Brother cordless  
telephones.  
• DO NOT tip the machine, or place it on any tilted surface. Doing this may cause ink spillage  
and internal damage to your machine.  
128  
   
Safety and Legal  
To use the machine safely  
A
A
Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any  
maintenance.  
Note  
If there are faxes in the machine's memory, you need to print them or save them before you  
unplug the machine from the AC power outlet for more than 24 hours. (To print the faxes in  
memory, see Printing a fax from the memory on page 57. To save the faxes in memory, see  
WARNING  
There are high voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you clean the inside of the  
machine, make sure you have unplugged the telephone line cord first and then the power cord  
from the AC power outlet. Doing this will prevent an electrical shock.  
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.  
DO NOT pull on the middle of the AC power cord. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine.  
129  
 
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray or an organic solvent/liquid that contains  
alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine.  
Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.  
If the machine becomes hot, releases smoke, or generates any strong smells, immediately  
unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Call Brother Customer Service. (See Brother  
If metal objects, water or other liquids get inside the machine, immediately unplug the machine  
from the AC power outlet. Call Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i.)  
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or  
terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.  
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a  
wet location.  
This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of an  
emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off the power  
completely.  
This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the  
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact a  
qualified electrician.  
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.  
130  
Safety and Legal  
A
DO NOT use the machine if the power cord is frayed or damaged, doing so may cause a fire.  
To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.  
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to  
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, including the following:  
• DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink  
or washing machine, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.  
• Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric  
shock from lightning.  
• DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
131  
CAUTION  
DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the machine under the document cover or the scanner  
cover. Doing this may cause injury.  
DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the paper tray under the paper tray cover. Doing this  
may cause injury.  
132  
Safety and Legal  
DO NOT touch the area shaded in the illustration. Doing this may cause injury.  
A
When moving the machine you must lift it from the base, by placing a hand at each side of the  
unit as shown in the illustration. DO NOT carry the machine by holding the scanner cover or Jam  
Clear Cover.  
Lightning and power surges can damage this product! We recommend that you use a quality  
surge protection device on the AC power line and on the telephone line, or unplug the cords  
during a lightning storm.  
DO NOT touch the Touchscreen immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning on the  
machine. Doing this may cause an error.  
133  
Important safety instructions  
A
1 Read all of these instructions.  
2 Save them for later reference.  
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
4 DO NOT use this product near water.  
5 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing  
serious damage to the product.  
6 Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation. To  
ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings  
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product  
on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over  
a radiator or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless  
adequate ventilation is provided.  
7 DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people  
can walk on the cord.  
8 If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings of the  
products plugged into the extension cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating.  
Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the AC power outlet does not exceed  
15 amperes (USA only).  
9 DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place  
anything in the path of received faxes.  
10 Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them up.  
11 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never  
spill liquid of any kind on the product. DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself because  
opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and  
may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the  
location of your nearest Brother Authorized Service Center, please call the following:  
In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)  
In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER  
12 Unplug this product from the AC power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized  
Service Personnel under the following conditions:  
If liquid has been spilled into the product.  
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed,  
adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.  
Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive  
work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.  
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.  
134  
 
Safety and Legal  
13 To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of a power protection  
device (Surge Protector).  
A
14 To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, note the following:  
DO NOT use this product near appliances that use water, a swimming pool, or in a wet  
basement.  
DO NOT use the machine during an electrical storm (there is the remote possibility of an  
electrical shock) or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
15 Caution - To reduce the risk of fire, use only No.26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.  
Standard telephone and FCC Notices (These notices are in effect  
on models sold and used in the United States only.)  
A
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.  
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:  
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging  
up.  
Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the  
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a  
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided  
to the telephone company.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,  
USOC RJ11C.  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network  
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A  
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be  
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for  
details.  
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be  
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,  
contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this  
product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits  
represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier  
products, the REN is separately shown on the label.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in  
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't  
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be  
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
135  
 
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures  
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will  
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted  
service.  
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact  
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i.) If the equipment is causing harm to  
the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment  
until the problem is resolved.  
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility  
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the  
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about  
what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.  
If you are not able to solve a problem with your machine, call Brother Customer Service. (See  
WARNING  
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall  
outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or  
connected to party lines.  
Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your  
use of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no  
warranties extended or granted by this document.  
This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the  
USA only.  
136  
Safety and Legal  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of  
Conformity (USA only)  
A
A
Responsible Brother International Corporation  
Party:  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
TEL: (908) 704-1700  
declares, that the product  
Product Name: MFC-795CW  
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or  
transmitter.  
IMPORTANT  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the  
user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)  
A
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of this device.  
137  
   
LAN connection  
A
CAUTION  
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.  
®
International ENERGY STAR Qualification Statement  
A
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and  
popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.  
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets  
the ENERGY STAR® specifications for energy efficiency.  
138  
   
Safety and Legal  
Legal limitations for copying  
A
A
Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil  
liability. This memorandum is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every  
possible prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you check with counsel as to any particular  
questionable documents.  
The following documents issued by the United States/Canadian Government or any of its  
Agencies may not be copied:  
Money  
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness  
Certificates of Deposit  
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
Selective Service or draft papers  
Passports  
United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
Food Stamps  
Immigration Papers  
Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies  
Identifying badges or insignias  
Copyrighted works cannot be copied. Sections of a copyrighted work can be copied for ‘fair use’.  
Multiple copies would indicate improper use.  
Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.  
Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles may not be copied under certain  
state/provincial laws.  
139  
 
Trademarks  
A
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Multi-Function Link is a registered trademark of Brother International Corporation.  
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Apple, Macintosh and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and  
other countries.  
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, PageMaker and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or  
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.  
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
Microdrive is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.  
CompactFlash is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation.  
Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
xD-Picture Card is a trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation, Toshiba Corporation and Olympus  
Optical Co. Ltd.  
PictBridge is a trademark.  
Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo, Memory Stick Duo, MagicGate Memory Stick,  
Memory Stick Micro and M2 are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
BROADCOM, SecureEasySetup and the SecureEasySetup logo are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Broadcom Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.  
Wi-Fi, WPA, WPA2 and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are either trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Wi-Fi Alliance in the United States and/or other countries.  
Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.  
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.  
FaceFilter Studio is a trademark of Reallusion, Inc.  
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License  
Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective companies.  
140  
 
Troubleshooting and Routine  
Maintenance  
B
B
Troubleshooting  
B
B
IMPORTANT  
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be  
made from within that country.  
If you think there is a problem with your machine, check the chart below and follow the  
troubleshooting tips.  
Most problems can be easily resolved by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother  
Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.  
If you are having difficulty with your machine  
B
Printing  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
No printout  
Check the interface cable or wireless connection on both the machine and your  
computer. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.  
One or more ink cartridges have reached the end of their life. (See Replacing the  
If the LCD says Cannot Printand Replace Ink, see Replacing the ink  
Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and  
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.  
Make sure that the machine is online. Click Start and then Printers and Faxes.  
Right-click and choose Brother MFC-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name),  
and make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.  
When you choose the Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages settings, you may  
see a printing error message on your computer, as the machine pauses during the  
printing process. The error message will disappear after the machine re-starts  
printing.  
Poor print quality  
Check the print quality. (See Checking the print quality on page 167.)  
Make sure that the Media Type setting in the printer driver or the Paper Type  
setting in the machine’s menu matches the type of paper you are using. (See  
Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s  
Guide on the CD-ROM and Paper Type on page 24.)  
141  
       
Printing (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Poor print quality  
(continued)  
Make sure that your ink cartridges are fresh. The following may cause ink to clog:  
The expiration date written on the cartridge package has passed. (Genuine  
Brother Innobella™ Ink cartridges stay usable for up to two years if kept in  
their original packaging.)  
The ink cartridge has been in your machine for over six months.  
The ink cartridge may not have been stored properly before use.  
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Try using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable paper and other print  
The recommended environment for your machine is between 68 °F to 91 °F  
(20 °C to 33 °C).  
White horizontal lines appear in text Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 167.)  
or graphics.  
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Try using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable paper and other print  
The machine prints blank pages.  
Characters and lines are stacked.  
Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 167.)  
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Check the printing alignment. (See Checking the print alignment on page 168.)  
Printed text or images are skewed. Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray and the paper side guides  
are adjusted correctly. (See Loading paper and other print media on page 10.)  
Make sure the Jam Clear Cover is closed properly.  
Smudged stain at the top center of Make sure the paper is not too thick or curled. (See Acceptable paper and other  
the printed page.  
Smudged stain at the right or left  
corner of the printed page.  
Make sure the paper is not curled when you print on the back side of the paper  
with the Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages settings.  
Printing appears dirty or ink seems Make sure you are using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable  
to run.  
paper and other print media on page 17.) Don't handle the paper until the ink is  
dry.  
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
If you are using photo paper, make sure that you have set the correct paper type.  
If you are printing a photo from your PC, set the Media Type in the Basic tab of  
the printer driver.  
Stains appear on the reverse side  
or at the bottom of the page.  
Make sure the printer platen is not dirty with ink. (See Cleaning the machine’s  
Make sure you are using the paper support flap. (See Loading paper and other  
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
The machine prints dense lines on Check Reverse Order in the Basic tab of the printer driver.  
the page.  
The printouts are wrinkled.  
In the printer driver Advanced tab, click Color Settings, and uncheck  
Bi-Directional Printing for Windows® or Bi-Directional Printing for Macintosh.  
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.  
Cannot perform ‘Page Layout’  
printing.  
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the  
same.  
142  
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Printing (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Print speed is too slow.  
Try changing the printer driver setting. The highest resolution needs longer data  
processing, sending and printing time. Try the other quality settings in the printer  
driver Basic tab. Also, click Color Settings, and make sure you uncheck Color  
B
Enhancement (True2Life®).  
Turn the borderless feature off. Borderless printing is slower than normal printing.  
(See Printing for Windows® or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
True2Life® is not working properly. If the image data is not full color in your application (such as 256 color), True2Life®  
will not work. Use at least 24 bit color data with the True2Life® feature.  
Photo paper does not feed  
properly.  
When you print on Brother Photo paper, load one extra sheet of the same photo  
paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has been included in the paper package  
for this purpose.  
Clean the paper pick-up roller.  
Machine feeds multiple pages.  
There is a paper jam.  
Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray. (See Loading paper and  
Check that more than two types of paper are not loaded in the paper tray at any  
one time.  
Make sure the paper length guide is set to the paper size. Do not extend the paper  
tray when you load A5 or smaller size paper. (See Printer jam or paper jam  
Printed pages are not stacked  
neatly.  
Make sure you are using the paper support flap. (See Loading paper and other  
Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Printing for Windows® or Printing and  
Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
Machine does not print from  
Adobe® Illustrator®.  
Printing Received Faxes  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Condensed print and white streaks You probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone  
across the page or the top and  
bottom of sentences are cut off.  
line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.  
Vertical black lines when receiving. The sender's scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the  
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.  
Received color fax prints only in  
black & white.  
Replace the color ink cartridges that have reached the end of their life, and then  
ask the other person to send the color fax again. (See Replacing the ink cartridges  
Left and right margins are cut off or Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax on page 56.)  
a single page is printed on two  
pages.  
143  
 
Telephone Line or Connections  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Dialing does not work.  
(No dial tone)  
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.  
(Canada only) Change the Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Verify that the telephone line and jack are working by connecting a known working  
telephone and telephone line to the jack. Press Speaker Phone or lift the  
machine's handset or the handset of an external telephone, and then listen for a  
dial tone. If there is no dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line  
and/ or jack.  
The machine does not answer  
when called.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode for your setup. (See  
Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 44.) Check for a dial tone. If possible,  
call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check that the  
telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the  
machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone  
company to check the line.  
Receiving Faxes  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot receive a fax.  
Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Speaker Phone key. If  
you hear static or interference on your fax line, please contact your local telephone  
company.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL  
or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the  
external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as  
the Brother machine. (See Receive mode settings on page 47.)  
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically  
answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Onlymode.  
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you  
should select the Manualmode. In Manualmode, your Brother machine will  
automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to leave a  
message on your answering machine.  
If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service,  
If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service,  
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to  
automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Telmode. In  
Fax/Telmode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and  
produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.  
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming  
faxes, you should select the Manualmode. In Manualmode, you must answer  
every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.  
144  
   
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Receiving Faxes (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot receive a fax.  
(continued)  
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your  
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:  
If the answer mode is set to Fax Onlyor Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to  
1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 47.)  
B
If the answer mode is set to Manual, reduce the number of rings programmed  
on your answering machine to 2.  
If the answer mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the ring delay setting.  
Have someone send you a test fax:  
If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.  
Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your  
original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then  
a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the  
machine has a chance to answer.  
If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber  
service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem  
with your fax line.  
If you are using a telephone answering machine (Manualmode) on the same line  
as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up correctly.  
1
2
3
Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your  
Brother machine’s LINE jack.  
Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT jack, and then  
plug the telephone line cord from your answering machine into the EXT jack.  
Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.  
If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your  
answering machine to answer within 2 or 3 rings.  
4
Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.  
Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing  
message.  
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people  
sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or  
press l 5 1 and Start to send a fax.”  
5
6
Set your answering machine to answer calls.  
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to Manual. (See Choose the  
Make sure your Brother machine’s Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy  
Receive is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered  
the call on an external or extension telephone. (See Easy Receive on page 48.)  
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone  
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See  
145  
Sending Faxes  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot send a fax.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.  
Make sure that the Fax  
key is illuminated. (See Entering Fax mode  
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.  
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error. (See Reports  
Transmission Verification Report  
says ‘RESULT:NG’.  
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.  
If you send a PC FAX message and get ‘Result:NG’ on the Transmission  
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To gain extra memory,  
you can turn off Memory Receive (see Turning off Memory Receive Operations  
on page 52), print fax messages in memory (see Printing a fax from the memory  
on page 57) or cancel a Delayed Fax or Polling Job (see Canceling a fax in  
problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.  
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone  
line, try changing the menu setting of Compatibility to Basic(for VoIP). (See  
Sent faxes are blank.  
Poor fax send quality.  
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents  
Try changing your resolution to Fineor S.Fine. Make a copy to check your  
machine's scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.  
Vertical black lines when sending.  
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid  
on the glass strip. Clean the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 165.)  
Handling Incoming Calls  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a  
CNG Tone.  
If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may  
mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling  
and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing  
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off. (See Easy  
Sending a fax call to the machine.  
Custom features on a single line.  
If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Fax Receive  
Code (the factory setting is l 5 1). If you answered on the external telephone  
(connected to the EXT jack), press Start to receive the fax. When your machine  
answers, hang up.  
If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Voice Mail, an alarm system or  
other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create  
a problem sending or receiving faxes.  
For example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and  
its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,  
the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother's ECM (Error  
Correction Mode) feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is  
related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send  
and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding  
a slight interruption is crucial to your business, a separate telephone line with no  
custom features is recommended.  
146  
   
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Copying Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot make a copy.  
Make sure that the Copy  
key is illuminated. (See Entering Copy mode  
B
Poor copy results when using the  
ADF.  
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 21.)  
Copies are blank.  
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents  
Vertical black lines or streaks  
appear in copies.  
Vertical black lines or streaks on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction  
fluid on the scanner. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the white bar and  
white plastic above them. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 165.)  
Fit to Page does not work properly. Make sure the document is not skewed on the scanner glass. Reposition the  
document and try again.  
Paper feeding and copying speed  
are slower when copying from the  
ADF.  
Paper feeding and copying speed become slower to prevent overheating of the  
machine when you make many copies using the ADF. Let the machine cool, and  
then try again later.  
Scanning Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
TWAIN/WIA errors appear when  
starting to scan.  
Make sure the Brother TWAIN/WIA driver is chosen as the primary source. In  
PaperPort® 11SE with OCR, click File, Scan or Get Photo and click Select to  
choose the Brother TWAIN/WIA driver.  
Poor scanning results when using  
the ADF.  
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 21.)  
OCR does not work.  
Try increasing the scanner resolution.  
Software Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot install software or print.  
Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair  
and reinstall the software.  
‘Device Busy’  
Make sure the machine is not showing an error message on the LCD.  
Cannot print images from  
FaceFilter Studio.  
To use FaceFilter Studio, you must install the FaceFilter Studio application from  
the CD-ROM supplied with your machine. To install FaceFilter Studio see the  
Quick Setup Guide.  
Also, before you start FaceFilter Studio for the first time, you must make sure your  
Brother machine is turned On, and connected to your computer. This will allow you  
to access all the functions of FaceFilter Studio.  
147  
     
PhotoCapture Center® Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
1
Have you installed the Windows® 2000 update? If not, do the following:  
Removable Disk does not work  
properly.  
1) Unplug the USB cable.  
2) Install the Windows® 2000 update using one of the following methods.  
Install MFL-Pro Suite from the CD-ROM. (See the Quick Setup  
Guide.)  
Download the latest service pack from the Microsoft Web site.  
3) Wait about 1 minute after you restart the PC, and then connect the USB  
cable.  
2
Take out the memory card or USB Flash memory drive and put it back in  
again.  
3
4
If you have tried ‘Eject’ from within Windows®, take out the memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive before you continue.  
If an error message appears when you try to eject the memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive, it means the card is being accessed. Wait a while and  
then try again.  
5
If all of the above do not work, turn off your PC and machine, and then turn  
them on again. (You will have to unplug the power cord of the machine to turn  
it off.)  
Cannot access Removable Disk  
from Desktop icon.  
Make sure that you have correctly inserted the memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive.  
Part of my photo is missing.  
Make sure that Borderless printing and Cropping are turned off. (See Borderless  
Network Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
Cannot print over the network.  
Make sure that your machine is powered on and is online and in Ready mode.  
Print a Network Configuration list (see Reports on page 89) and check the current  
Network settings printed in this list. Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify  
that the cabling and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the  
machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. If the connections  
are good, the machine shows LAN Activefor 2 seconds.  
(If you are using a wireless connection or are having Network problems, see the  
Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM for more information.)  
148  
   
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Network Difficulties (continued)  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
<Windows® users>  
The network scanning feature does  
not work.  
Firewall settings on your PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection.  
Follow the instructions below to configure the Firewall. If you are using a personal  
Firewall software, see the User’s Guide for your software or contact the software  
manufacturer.  
B
For Windows® XP SP2 and Windows Vista® users, see Firewall settings in the  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.  
For Windows® XP SP1 user’s, please visit the Brother Solutions Center:  
<Macintosh users>  
Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in  
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the  
model list in ControlCenter2.  
<Windows® users>  
The network PC-Fax Receive  
feature does not work.  
Firewall settings on your PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection.  
Follow the instructions below to configure the Firewall. If you are using a personal  
Firewall software, see the User’s Guide for your software or contact the software  
manufacturer.  
For Windows® XP SP2 and Windows Vista® users, see Firewall settings in the  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.  
For Windows® XP SP1 user’s, please visit the Brother Solutions Center:  
<Windows® users>  
Your computer cannot find your  
machine.  
Firewall settings on your PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection.  
For detail, see the instruction above.  
<Macintosh users>  
Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in  
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the  
model list in ControlCenter2.  
Touchscreen Difficulties  
Difficulty  
Suggestions  
The dial pad does not work when  
entering numbers or characters.  
Use the touchscreen buttons to enter information.  
149  
Dial Tone  
B
Telephone line interference  
B
Setting the dial tone to Detection will shorten  
the dial detect pause.  
If you are having problems sending or  
receiving a fax due to possible interference  
on the telephone line, we recommend that  
you adjust the Equalization for compatibility  
to reduce the modem speed for fax  
operations.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
Initial Setup.  
a Press MENU.  
c Press Initial Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Dial Tone.  
e Press Dial Tone.  
b Press a or b to display  
Initial Setup.  
c Press Initial Setup.  
f Press Detectionor No Detection.  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press a or b to display  
Compatibility.  
e Press Compatibility.  
f Press High, Normalor  
Basic(for VoIP).  
Basic(for VoIP)reduces the  
modem speed to 9,600 bps. Unless  
interference is a recurring problem  
on your telephone line, you may  
prefer to use it only when needed.  
Normalsets the modem speed at  
14,400 bps.  
Highincreases the modem speed to  
33,600 bps. (factory setting)  
g Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
When you change the compatibility to  
Basic(for VoIP), the ECM feature is  
only available for color fax sending.  
150  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Error and Maintenance messages  
B
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be  
replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the problem and shows an error message. The  
most common error and maintenance messages are shown below.  
B
You can correct most errors and clear routine maintenance messages by yourself. If you need  
more help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
B&W Print Only  
One or more of the color ink  
Replace the ink cartridges. (See Replacing  
cartridges have reached the end the ink cartridges on page 162.)  
of their life.  
You can use the machine in black  
& white mode for approximately  
four weeks depending on the  
number of pages you print.  
While this message appears on  
the LCD, each operation works in  
the following way:  
Printing  
If you click Grayscale in the  
Advanced tab of the printer  
driver you can use the  
machine as a black & white  
printer.  
Copying  
If the paper type is set to  
Plain Paperor  
Inkjet Paperyou can  
make copies in black & white.  
Faxing  
If the paper type is set to  
Plain Paperor  
Inkjet Paperthe machine  
will receive and print the faxes  
in black & white. If a sending  
machine has a color fax, the  
machine’s handshake will ask  
that the fax be sent as black &  
white.  
If the paper type is set to  
Other Glossyor  
Brother BP71, the machine will  
stop all print operations. If you  
unplug the machine, or take out  
the ink cartridge, you cannot use  
the machine until you change to a  
new ink cartridge.  
151  
     
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Cannot Detect  
You installed a new ink cartridge Take out the new ink cartridge and  
too quickly and the machine did  
not detect it.  
re-install it slowly until it clicks.  
If you are not using genuine  
Brother Innobella™ ink the  
machine may not detect the ink  
cartridge.  
Use a new Genuine Brother Innobella™  
Ink Cartridge. If the error is not cleared, call  
Brother Customer Service.  
An ink cartridge is not installed  
properly.  
Take out the new ink cartridge and re-  
install it slowly until it clicks.  
Cannot Print  
One or more of the ink cartridges Replace the ink cartridges. (See Replacing  
have reached the end of their life. the ink cartridges on page 162.)  
The machine will stop all print  
operations. While memory is  
available, black & white faxes will  
be stored in the memory. If a  
sending machine has a color fax,  
the machine's ‘handshake’ will  
ask that the fax be sent as black &  
white. If the sending machine has  
the ability to convert it, the color  
fax will be stored in the memory  
as a black & white fax.  
Comm.Error  
Poor telephone line quality  
caused a communication error.  
Send the fax again or connect the machine  
to another telephone line. If the problem  
continues, call the telephone company and  
ask them to check your telephone line.  
Connection Fail  
Cover is Open.  
You tried to poll a fax machine  
that is not in Polled Waiting mode. setup.  
Check the other fax machine's polling  
The scanner cover is not closed  
completely.  
Lift the scanner cover and then close it  
again.  
The ink cartridge cover is not  
completely closed.  
Firmly close the ink cartridge cover until it  
clicks.  
Data Remaining  
Disconnected  
Document Jam  
Print data is left in the machine's Press Stop/Exit. The machine will cancel  
memory.  
the job and clear it from the memory. Try to  
print again.  
The other person or other  
person's fax machine stopped the  
call.  
Try to send or receive again.  
The document was not inserted or See Using the ADF on page 21.  
fed properly, or the document  
scanned from the ADF was too  
long.  
High Temperature  
Hub is Unusable.  
The print head is too warm.  
Allow the machine to cool down.  
A Hub or USB Flash memory  
drive with Hub has been  
connected to the USB direct  
interface.  
A Hub or USB Flash memory drive with  
Hub are not supported. Unplug the device  
from the USB direct interface.  
152  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Image Too Long.  
The proportions of your photo are Choose a regularly proportioned image.  
irregular so effects could not be  
added.  
Image Too Small.  
Ink low  
The size of your photo is too small Choose a larger image.  
to trim.  
B
One or more of the ink cartridges Order a new ink cartridge. You can  
are near the end of their life. If a  
continue printing until the LCD shows  
sending machine has a color fax Cannot Print. (See Ordering  
to send, your machine’s  
‘handshake’ will ask that the fax  
be sent as black & white. If the  
sending machine has the ability to  
convert it, the color fax will be  
printed at your machine as a black  
& white fax.  
Low Temperature  
Media Error  
The print head is too cold.  
Allow the machine to warm up.  
The memory card is either  
corrupted, improperly formatted,  
or there is a problem with the  
card.  
Put the card firmly into the slot again to  
make sure it is in the correct position. If the  
error remains, check the media drive (slot)  
of the machine by putting in another  
memory card that you know is working.  
Media is Full.  
No Caller ID  
The memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive you are using  
already contains 999 files.  
Your machine can only save to your  
memory card or USB Flash memory drive  
if it contains less than 999 files. Try  
deleting unused files to free some space  
and try again.  
There is no incoming call history. If you want to use the Caller ID feature call  
You did not receive calls or you your telephone company. (See Caller ID  
have not subscribed to the Caller on page 65.)  
ID service from your telephone  
company.  
No Cartridge  
No File  
An ink cartridge is not installed  
properly.  
Take out the new ink cartridge and  
re-install it slowly until it clicks. (See  
The memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive in the media drive  
does not contain a .JPG file.  
Put the correct memory card or USB Flash  
memory drive into the slot again.  
153  
   
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
No Paper Fed  
The Photo Bypass Tray is in the  
Photo printing position.  
Verify that the Photo Bypass Tray is in the  
Normal printing position. (See step d and  
the Important note in Loading photo paper  
The machine is out of paper or  
paper is not properly loaded in the  
paper tray.  
Do one of the following:  
Refill the paper in the paper tray, and  
then press Black Start or Color Start.  
Remove the paper and load it again  
and then press Black Start or  
Color Start. (See Loading paper and  
The paper is jammed in the  
machine.  
Remove the jammed paper by following  
The Jam Clear Cover is not  
closed properly.  
Check that the Jam Clear Cover is closed  
evenly at both ends. (See Printer jam or  
No Response/Busy  
Not Registered  
Out of Memory  
The number you dialed does not Verify the number and try again.  
answer or is busy.  
You tried to access a Speed Dial Set up the Speed Dial number. (See  
number that is not programmed.  
The machine's memory is full.  
Fax sending or copy operation in  
progress  
Do one of the following:  
Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other  
operations in progress finish and then  
try again.  
Clear the data in the memory. To gain  
extra memory, you can turn off Memory  
Receive. (See Turning off Memory  
Print the faxes that are in the memory.  
The memory card or USB Flash  
Delete unused files from your memory card  
memory drive you are using does or USB Flash memory drive to make some  
not have enough free space to  
scan the document.  
free space and then try again.  
154  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Paper Jam  
Paper is jammed in the machine. Open the Jam Clear Cover (at the back of  
the machine) and pull out the jammed  
paper by following steps in Printer jam or  
B
Make sure the paper length guide is fit to  
the paper size. Do not extend the paper  
tray when you load A5 or smaller size  
paper.  
Touchscreen  
initialization  
failed  
The Touchscreen was pressed  
before the power on initialization or touching the Touchscreen.  
was completed.  
Make sure that there is nothing resting on  
Unable to Clean XX The machine has a mechanical  
Open the scanner cover and remove any  
foreign objects and paper scraps from  
inside the machine. If the error message  
disconnecting the machine so you will not  
lose any important messages. Then,  
disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes and reconnect it.  
problem.  
Unable to Init. XX  
OR—  
Unable to Print XX  
A foreign object such as a paper  
clip or ripped paper is in the  
Unable to Scan XX  
(If the LCD shows  
machine.  
error number 46,  
see the error message  
Unable to Clean 46  
Unable to Init. 46  
Unable to Print 46  
in this table.)  
155  
       
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Unable to Clean 46 The ink absorber box or flushing  
The ink absorber box or flushing box will  
box is full. These components are need to be replaced. Contact Brother  
Unable to Init. 46  
Unable to Print 46  
periodic maintenance items that  
may require replacement after a  
Customer Service or a Brother Authorized  
Service Center to have your machine  
period of time to ensure optimum serviced. (See Brother numbers  
performance from your Brother  
machine. The need to replace  
these items and the time period  
before replacement is dependent  
on the number of purges and  
flushes required to clean the ink  
system. These boxes acquire  
amounts of ink during the different  
purging and flushing operations.  
The number of times a machine  
purges and flushes for cleaning  
varies depending on different  
situations. For example,  
Other reasons for cleaning are:  
1
Machine automatically cleans after  
clearing a printer jam.  
2
Machine automatically cleans after  
sitting idle for more than 45 days  
(infrequent use).  
frequently powering the machine  
on and off will cause numerous  
cleaning cycles since the machine  
automatically cleans upon power  
up. The use of generic inks may  
cause frequent cleanings  
because generic inks could cause  
poor print quality which is  
resolved by cleaning. The more  
cleaning the machine requires the  
faster these boxes will fill up.  
Note  
Repairs resulting from the use  
of non-genuine supplies may  
not be covered under the  
stated product warranty.  
Unusable Device  
A broken device has been  
connected to the USB direct  
interface.  
Unplug the device from the USB direct  
interface, then press On/Off to turn the  
machine off and then on again.  
Disconnect device  
fromfrontconnector  
& turn machine off  
& then on  
156  
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Unusable Device  
A USB device or USB Flash  
memory drive that is not  
supported has been connected to  
the USB direct interface.  
Unplug the device from the USB direct  
interface.  
Please Disconnect  
USB Device.  
B
For more information, visit us at  
Wrong Paper Size  
Paper is not the correct size.  
Check that the machine's Paper Size  
setting matches the size of paper in the  
tray. Load the correct size of paper, and  
then press Black Start or Color Start.  
Error animation  
B
Transferring your faxes or  
Fax Journal report  
B
Error animations display step-by-step  
instructions when paper gets jammed. You  
can read the steps at your own pace by  
pressing c to see the next step and d to go  
backward. If you do not press a key after  
1 minute the animation starts running  
automatically again.  
If the LCD shows:  
Unable to CleanXX  
Unable to Init.XX  
Unable to PrintXX  
Unable to ScanXX  
Note  
We recommend transferring your faxes to  
another fax machine or to your PC. (See  
You can press d or c to pause the auto-  
animation and go back to step-by-step  
mode.  
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report  
to see if there are any faxes you need to  
157  
     
c Make sure you have set PC Fax  
Receive on the machine. (See PC Fax  
Transferring faxes to another fax  
machine  
B
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your  
station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)  
If faxes are in the machine’s memory  
when you set up PC Fax Receive, the  
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the  
faxes to your PC.  
a Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error  
temporarily.  
d Do one of the following:  
b Press MENU.  
To transfer all faxes to your PC,  
press Yes. You will be asked if you  
want to also turn on backup print.  
c Press a or b to display Service.  
d Press Service.  
To exit and leave the faxes in the  
memory, press No.  
e Press Data Transfer.  
f Press Fax Transfer.  
g Do one of the following:  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Transferring Fax Journal report to  
another fax machine  
B
If the LCD shows No Data, there  
are no faxes left in the machine's  
memory.  
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your  
station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)  
Press Stop/Exit.  
a Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error  
Enter the fax number to which faxes  
temporarily.  
will be forwarded.  
b Press MENU.  
h Press Black Start.  
c Press a or b to display Service.  
d Press Service.  
Transferring faxes to your PC  
B
You can transfer the faxes from your  
machine's memory to your PC.  
e Press Data Transfer.  
f Press Report Trans.  
a Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error  
temporarily.  
g Enter the fax number to which the Fax  
b Make sure you have installed MFL-Pro  
Suite on your PC, and then turn on PC  
FAX Receiving on the PC. (For details  
see PC- FAX receiving for Windows® in  
the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
Journal report will be forwarded.  
h Press Black Start.  
158  
         
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Document is jammed inside the ADF  
unit  
Document jam  
B
B
Documents can jam in the ADF unit if they are  
not inserted or fed properly, or if they are too  
long. Follow the steps below to clear a  
document jam.  
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
B
b Lift the document cover.  
Document is jammed in the top of the  
ADF unit  
c Pull the jammed document out to the  
B
left.  
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Open the ADF cover.  
c Pull the jammed document up and to the  
left.  
d Close the document cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
d Close the ADF cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
IMPORTANT  
To avoid future document jams close the  
ADF cover properly by pressing it down in  
the middle.  
159  
   
d Open the Jam Clear Cover (1) at the  
back of the machine. Pull the jammed  
paper out of the machine.  
Printer jam or paper jam  
B
Take out the jammed paper depending on  
where it is jammed in the machine.  
a If the paper support flap is open, close it,  
and then pull the paper tray completely  
out of the machine.  
1
b Pull out the jammed paper (1) and press  
Stop/Exit.  
e Close the Jam Clear Cover.  
1
Make sure the cover is closed properly.  
c Reset the machine by lifting the scanner  
cover from the front of the machine and  
then closing it.  
If you cannot remove the jammed  
paper from the front of the machine,  
or the error message still appears on  
the LCD after you have removed the  
jammed paper, please go to the next  
step.  
160  
   
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
f Lift the scanner cover (1) from the front  
side of the machine until it locks  
securely in the open position. Make sure  
that there is no jammed paper left inside  
the machine.  
g Lift the scanner cover to release the  
lock ( ). Gently push the scanner cover  
support down ( ) and close the  
scanner cover ( ) using both hands.  
1
B
1
2
3
IMPORTANT  
h Push the paper tray firmly back into the  
• If the paper is jammed under the print  
head, unplug the machine from the power  
source, and then move the print head to  
take out the paper.  
machine.  
i While holding the paper tray in place,  
pull out the paper support ( ) until it  
clicks, and then unfold the paper  
support flap ( ).  
• If the print head is at the right corner as  
shown in the illustration, you cannot move  
the print head. Hold down Stop/Exit until  
the print head moves to the middle. Then  
unplug the machine from the power  
source, and take out the paper.  
2
1
Make sure you pull out the paper  
support until it clicks.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT use the paper support flap for  
Legal size paper.  
• If ink gets on your skin, immediately wash  
it off with soap or detergent.  
161  
a Open the ink cartridge cover.  
If one or more ink cartridges have  
reached the end of their life, for example  
Black, the LCD shows  
Routine maintenance  
B
Replacing the ink cartridges  
B
B&W Print Onlyor Cannot Print.  
Your machine is equipped with an ink dot  
counter. The ink dot counter automatically  
monitors the level of ink in each of the  
4 cartridges. When the machine detects an  
ink cartridge is running out of ink, the machine  
will tell you with a message on the LCD.  
b Press down to unlock the release lever  
and take out the ink cartridge for the  
color shown on the LCD.  
The LCD will tell you which ink cartridge is low  
or needs replacing. Be sure to follow the LCD  
prompts to replace the ink cartridges in the  
correct order.  
Even though the machine tells you to replace  
an ink cartridge, there will be a small amount  
of ink left in the ink cartridge. It is necessary  
to keep some ink in the ink cartridge to  
prevent air from drying out and damaging the  
print head assembly.  
IMPORTANT  
Brother strongly recommends that you do  
not refill the ink cartridges provided with  
your machine. We also strongly  
recommend that you continue to use only  
Genuine Brother Brand replacement ink  
cartridges. Use or attempted use of  
potentially incompatible ink and/or  
cartridges in the Brother machine may  
cause damage to the machine and/or may  
result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our  
warranty coverage does not apply to any  
problem that is caused by the use of  
unauthorized third party ink and/or  
cartridges. To protect your investment and  
obtain premium performance from the  
Brother machine, we strongly recommend  
the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.  
c Open the new ink cartridge bag for the  
color shown on the LCD, and then take  
out the ink cartridge.  
162  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
d Turn the green knob on the protective  
yellow cap clockwise until it clicks to  
release the vacuum seal, then remove  
the cap (1).  
g The machine will automatically reset the  
ink dot counter.  
Note  
• If you replaced an ink cartridge, the LCD  
may ask you to verify that it was a brand  
new one (for example, Did You Change  
Black). For each new cartridge you  
installed, press Yesto automatically reset  
the ink dot counter for that color. If the ink  
cartridge you installed is not a brand new  
one, be sure to press No.  
B
• If the LCD shows No Cartridgeor  
Cannot Detectafter you install the ink  
cartridges, check that the ink cartridges  
are installed properly.  
1
CAUTION  
If ink gets in your eyes, wash them out with  
water at once and call a doctor if you are  
concerned.  
e Each color has its own correct position.  
Insert the ink cartridge in the direction of  
the arrow on the label.  
f Gently push in the ink cartridge until it  
clicks, and then close the ink cartridge  
cover.  
163  
Cleaning the outside of the  
machine  
IMPORTANT  
B
• DO NOT take out ink cartridges if you do  
not need to replace them. If you do so, it  
may reduce the ink quantity and the  
machine will not know the quantity of ink  
left in the cartridge.  
Clean the Touchscreen as follows:  
IMPORTANT  
• Disconnect the power cord from the AC  
power outlet when you clean the  
Touchscreen.  
• DO NOT touch the cartridge insertion  
slots. If you do so, the ink may stain your  
skin.  
• DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners  
(including ethanol).  
• If ink gets on your skin or clothing  
immediately wash it off with soap or  
detergent.  
• If you mix the colors by installing an ink  
cartridge in the wrong position, clean the  
print head several times after correcting  
the cartridge installation.  
a Clean the Touchscreen with a dry  
lint-free soft cloth.  
• Once you open an ink cartridge, install it in  
the machine and use it up within six  
months of installation. Use unopened ink  
cartridges by the expiration date written on  
the cartridge package.  
• DO NOT dismantle or tamper with the ink  
cartridge, this can cause the ink to leak out  
of the cartridge.  
Clean the outside of the machine as  
follows:  
IMPORTANT  
• Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with  
volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine  
will damage the outside surface of the  
machine.  
• DO NOT use cleaning materials that  
contain ammonia.  
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove  
dirt from the control panel. It may crack the  
panel.  
164  
 
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
a Pull the paper tray (1) completely out of  
Cleaning the scanner  
B
the machine.  
a Lift the document cover (1). Clean the  
scanner glass (2) and the white  
plastic (3) with a soft lint-free cloth  
moistened with a non-flammable glass  
cleaner.  
1
B
1
b Wipe the outside of the machine with a  
3
dry lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.  
2
b In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)  
and the glass strip (2) with a lint-free  
cloth moistened with a non-flammable  
glass cleaner.  
c Lift the output paper tray cover and  
remove anything that is stuck inside the  
paper tray.  
d Wipe the paper tray with a dry lint-free  
1
soft cloth to remove dust.  
2
Note  
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass  
and glass strip with a non-flammable glass  
cleaner, run your finger tip over the glass  
to see if you can feel anything on it. If you  
feel dirt or debris, clean the glass again  
concentrating on that area. You may need  
to repeat the cleaning process three or  
four times. To test, make a copy after each  
cleaning attempt.  
e Close the output paper tray cover and  
put the paper tray firmly back in the  
machine.  
165  
   
Cleaning the machine’s  
printer platen  
Cleaning the paper pick-up  
rollers  
B
B
a Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
CAUTION  
machine.  
Be sure to unplug the machine from the AC  
power outlet before cleaning the printer  
platen (1) to avoid an electrical shock.  
b Unplug the machine from the AC power  
outlet and open the Jam Clear Cover (1)  
at the back of the machine.  
a Lift the scanner cover until it locks  
securely in the open position.  
b Clean the machine’s printer platen (1)  
and the area around it, wiping off any  
scattered ink with a soft, dry lint-free  
cloth.  
1
c Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers (1) with  
isopropyl alcohol on a cotton swab.  
1
1
d Close the Jam Clear Cover.  
Make sure the cover is closed properly.  
e Put the paper tray firmly back in the  
machine.  
f Re-connect the power cord.  
166  
       
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Cleaning the print head  
B
Checking the print quality  
B
To maintain good print quality, the machine  
will automatically clean the print head when  
needed. You can start the cleaning process  
manually if there is a print quality problem.  
If faded or streaked colors and text appear on  
your output, some of the nozzles may be  
clogged. You can check this by printing the  
Print Quality Check Sheet and looking at the  
nozzle check pattern.  
B
Clean the print head and ink cartridges if you  
get a horizontal line in the text or graphics or  
blank text on your printed pages. You can  
clean Black only, three colors at a time  
(Cyan/Yellow/Magenta), or all four colors at  
once.  
a Press  
.
b Press Test Print.  
c Press Print Quality.  
Cleaning the print head consumes ink.  
Cleaning too often uses ink unnecessarily.  
d Press Color Start.  
The machine begins printing the Print  
Quality Check Sheet.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching  
the print head may cause permanent  
damage and may void the print head's  
warranty.  
e Check the quality of the four color blocks  
on the sheet.  
f The LCD asks you if the print quality is  
OK.  
Do one of the following:  
a Press  
.
If all lines are clear and visible, press  
Yesto finish the Print Quality check  
and go to step j.  
b Press Cleaning.  
If you can see missing short lines as  
shown below, press No.  
c Press Black, Coloror All.  
The machine cleans the print head.  
When cleaning is finished, the machine  
will go back to the Ready Screen  
automatically.  
OK  
Poor  
Note  
If you clean the print head at least five  
times and the print has not improved, try  
installing a new Genuine Brother  
Innobella™ replacement cartridge for  
each problem color. Try cleaning the print  
head again up to five more times. If the  
print has not improved call Brother  
Customer Service. (See Brother numbers  
g The LCD asks you if the print quality is  
OK for black and three colors.  
Press Yesor No.  
h The LCD asks you if you want to start  
cleaning.  
Press Color Start.  
The machine starts cleaning the print  
head.  
167  
         
i After cleaning is finished, press  
Color Start.  
Checking the print alignment  
B
The machine starts printing the Print  
Quality Check Sheet again and then  
return to step e.  
You may need to adjust the print alignment  
after transporting the machine, or if your  
printed text becomes blurred or images  
become faded.  
j Press Stop/Exit.  
If you repeat this procedure at least five  
times and the print quality is still poor,  
replace the ink cartridge for the clogged  
color.  
a Press  
.
b Press Test Print.  
c Press Alignment.  
After replacing the ink cartridge, check  
the print quality. If the problem still  
exists, repeat the cleaning and test print  
procedures at least five times for the  
new ink cartridge. If ink is still missing,  
call Brother Customer Service. (See  
d Press Black Start or Color Start.  
The machine starts printing the  
Alignment Check Sheet.  
e Check the 600 dpi and 1200 dpi test  
prints to see if number 5 most closely  
matches number 0.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching  
the print head may cause permanent  
damage and may void the print head's  
warranty.  
f Do one of the following:  
If the number 5 samples of both the  
600 dpi and 1200 dpi test prints are  
the best matches, press Yesto finish  
the Alignment Check and go to  
step i.  
Note  
If another test print number is a  
better match for either 600 dpi or  
1200 dpi, press Noto choose it.  
i
g For 600 dpi, press the number of the test  
print that most closely matches the  
number 0 sample (1-8).  
When a print head  
nozzle is clogged  
the printed  
sample looks like  
this.  
After the print  
head nozzle is  
cleaned, the  
horizontal lines  
are gone.  
h For 1200 dpi, press the number of the  
test print that most closely matches the  
number 0 sample (1-8).  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
168  
       
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
b Pull the tab (1) back and hold it in  
position as you push the cradle (2) to the  
back of the machine.  
Checking the ink volume  
B
Although an ink volume icon appears on the  
LCD, you can use the ink menu to see a large  
graph showing the ink that is left in each  
cartridge.  
1
B
a Press  
.
b Press Ink Volume.  
The LCD shows the ink volume.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
2
You can check the ink volume from your  
computer. (See Printing for Windows® or  
Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
c Attach the side cover.  
Uninstalling and installing the  
handset and handset cradle  
B
If you do not use the handset you can remove  
the handset and handset cradle.  
Uninstalling the handset and handset  
cradle  
B
Installing the handset and handset  
cradle  
B
a Unplug the curled handset cord from the  
machine.  
a Remove the side cover.  
Note  
If you cannot open the cover with your  
hand, use a coin to open it.  
169  
   
b Align the recessed arrows on the cradle  
with those on the machine, and then  
slide the cradle toward the front of the  
machine until it clicks into place.  
Machine Information  
B
Checking the serial number  
B
You can see the machine’s serial number on  
the LCD.  
a Press MENU.  
b Press a or b to display  
Machine Info.  
c Press Machine Info.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Reset functions  
B
The following reset functions are available:  
c Connect the curled handset cord to the  
machine.  
1 Network  
You can reset the print server back to its  
default factory settings such as the IP  
address information.  
2 Speed Dial&Fax  
Speed Dial & Fax resets the following  
settings:  
Speed Dial  
(Speed-Dial and Groups)  
Programmed fax jobs in the memory  
(Polled Transmit, Delayed Fax and  
Delayed Batch Transmission)  
Station ID  
(Name and Number)  
Remote Fax Options  
(Fax Forwarding and Paging)  
Report settings  
(Transmission Verification Report,  
Quick Dial List and Fax Journal)  
Message Center  
(OGM, ICM and Recorded Calls)  
Faxes in the memory  
170  
     
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
Call History  
Packing and shipping  
the machine  
(Call ID history and Outgoing Call  
history)  
B
3 All Settings  
When you transport the machine, use the  
packing materials that came with your  
machine. If you do not pack the machine  
properly, you may void your warranty.  
B
You can reset all the machine settings  
back to the settings that were set at the  
factory.  
Brother strongly recommends you use this  
operation when you dispose of the  
machine.  
IMPORTANT  
It is important to allow the machine to  
‘park’ the print head after a print job. Listen  
carefully to the machine before  
Note  
unplugging it to make sure that all  
mechanical noise has stopped. Not  
allowing the machine to finish this parking  
process may lead to print problems and  
possible damage to the print head.  
Unplug the interface cable before you  
choose Networkor All Settings.  
How to reset the machine  
B
a Press MENU.  
a Open the ink cartridge cover.  
b Press a or b to display  
Initial Setup.  
b Press the ink release lever to release  
the ink cartridge and take out the ink  
cartridges. (See Replacing the ink  
c Press Initial Setup.  
d Press a or b to display Reset.  
e Press Reset.  
c Install the green protective part and then  
close the ink cartridge cover.  
f Press the reset function you want to use.  
g Press Yes.  
h Press Yesfor 2 seconds to confirm to  
reset.  
171  
   
d Lift the machine from the front and hook  
the tab of the green protective part into  
the keyed opening (1) on the bottom of  
the paper tray. Then latch the protective  
part over the raised portion of the paper  
tray (2).  
IMPORTANT  
• Make sure that the plastic tabs on both  
sides of the green protective part (1) have  
securely clicked into place (2).  
2
1
2
• If you are not able to find the green  
protective part, DO NOT remove the ink  
cartridges before shipping. It is essential  
that the machine be shipped with either  
the green protective part or the ink  
cartridges in position. Shipping without  
them will cause damage to your machine  
and may void your warranty.  
1
e Unplug the machine from the telephone  
wall jack and take the telephone line  
cord out of the machine.  
f Unplug the machine from the AC power  
outlet.  
g Using both hands, use the plastic tabs  
on both sides of the machine to lift the  
scanner cover until it locks securely into  
the open position. Then unplug the  
interface cable from the machine, if it is  
connected.  
172  
Troubleshooting and Routine Maintenance  
j Pack the machine and the printed  
materials in the original carton with the  
original packing material as shown in  
the illustration.  
h Lift the scanner cover ( ) to release the  
lock. Gently push the scanner cover  
support down ( ) and close the  
scanner cover ( ) using both hands.  
Do not pack the used ink cartridges in  
the carton.  
1
B
Note  
If you are returning your machine to  
Brother as part of the Exchange Service,  
pack only the machine. Keep all separate  
parts and printed materials to use with  
your ‘Exchange’ machine.  
3
2
i Wrap the machine in the bag.  
k Close the carton and tape it shut.  
173  
Menu and Features  
C
C
On-screen  
programming  
Mode and menu keys  
C
C
Access the main menu.  
MENU  
Your machine is designed to be easy to  
operate with LCD on-screen programming  
using the menu buttons on the Touchscreen.  
User-friendly programming helps you take full  
advantage of all the menu selections your  
machine has to offer.  
Access each mode and its menu  
of temporary settings.  
Since your programming is done on the LCD,  
we have created step-by-step on-screen  
instructions to help you program your  
Exit the menu or stop the current  
operation.  
machine. All you need to do is follow the  
instructions as they guide you through the  
menu selections and programming options.  
Menu table  
C
You can program your machine by using the  
Menu table that begins on page 175. These  
pages list the menu selections and options.  
Memory storage  
C
Even if there is a power failure, you will not  
lose the settings you have chosen using the  
Menu key because they are stored  
permanently. Also, you will not lose your  
settings in the PhotoCapture, Fax and Copy  
mode key menus if you have chosen  
Set New Default.  
IMPORTANT  
During a power failure the machine will  
retain messages that are in the memory  
for approximately 24 hours.  
174  
         
Menu and Features  
Menu table  
C
The menu table will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the  
machine's programs. The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
MENU  
MENU (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
C
General Setup Mode Timer  
Off  
Sets the time to return to  
Fax mode.  
0 Sec  
30 Secs  
1 Min  
2 Mins*  
5 Mins  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Volume  
Plain Paper*  
Inkjet Paper  
Brother BP71  
Other Glossy  
Sets the type of paper in  
the paper tray.  
Transparency  
Letter*  
Sets the size of the paper 24  
in the paper tray.  
Legal  
A4  
A5  
4"x6"  
Off  
Ring  
Adjusts the ring volume.  
Low  
Med*  
High  
Off  
Beeper  
Speaker  
Handset  
Adjusts the volume level  
of the beeper.  
Low*  
Med  
High  
Off  
Adjusts the volume level  
of the speaker.  
Low  
Med*  
High  
Low*  
High  
Adjusts the handset  
volume.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
175  
   
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
General Setup Volume  
Volume Amplify On(Permanent/  
Temporary)  
For the hearing-impaired, 27  
you can set the volume to  
the Volume Amplify:  
Onsetting on a permanent  
or temporary basis.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
Off*  
Auto Daylight  
LCD Settings  
On  
Change this setting to On 28  
if you want the machine to  
change automatically for  
Daylight Savings Time.  
Off*  
Backlight  
Dim Timer  
Light*  
Med  
You can adjust the  
brightness of the LCD  
backlight.  
Dark  
Off  
You can set how long the 29  
LCD backlight stays on  
after you go back to the  
Ready screen.  
10 Secs  
20 Secs  
30 Secs*  
1 Min  
2 Mins  
3 Mins  
5 Mins*  
10 Mins  
30 Mins  
60 Mins  
Ring Delay  
0
Sleep Mode  
You can choose how long 28  
the machine must be idle  
before it goes into sleep  
mode.  
Fax  
Setup Receive Ring Delay  
Sets the number of rings  
before the machine  
answers in Fax Only or  
Fax/Tel mode.  
1
2
3
4*  
Toll Saver  
On  
Cost saving feature: the  
machine rings 2 times if  
there are messages and  
4 times if there are no  
messages, so you can  
hang up and not pay for  
the call.  
Off*  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
176  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Fax  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Setup Receive F/T Ring Time 20 Secs*  
Sets the pseudo/double-  
ring time in Fax/Tel mode.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
30 Secs  
40 Secs  
70 Secs  
Easy Receive On*  
Receives fax messages  
automatically when you  
answer a call and hear fax  
tone.  
Semi  
Off  
C
Remote Codes On*  
Allows you to answer all  
calls at an extension or  
external telephone and  
use codes to turn the  
machine on or off. You  
can personalize these  
codes.  
(l51, #51)  
Off  
Auto Reduction On*  
Reduces the size of  
incoming faxes.  
Off  
Memory Receive Off*  
You can set the machine  
to either forward fax  
messages, call your  
Fax Forward  
Paging  
pager, store incoming  
faxes in the memory (so  
you can retrieve them  
Fax Storage  
PC Fax Receive while you are away from  
your machine), or send  
faxes to your PC.  
If you choose FaxForward  
or PC Fax Receive, you  
can turn on the Backup  
Print safety feature.  
Fax Preview On  
Off*  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
You can preview faxes.  
177  
Level1  
Fax  
Level2  
Report Setting Transmission On  
On+Image  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Initial setup for  
Transmission Verification  
Report and Fax Journal  
Report.  
(Continued)  
Off*  
Off+Image  
Journal Period Off  
Every 50 Faxes  
*
Every 6 Hours  
Every 12 Hours  
Every 24 Hours  
Every 2 Days  
Every 7 Days  
Print Fax  
Prints incoming faxes  
stored in the memory.  
Remote Access  
Remaining Jobs  
---l  
Set your own code for  
Remote Retrieval.  
Check which jobs are in  
the memory and lets you  
cancel chosen jobs.  
Setup Msg Ctr OGM  
Msg Ctr OGM  
F/T OGM  
Play/Record or erase the  
outgoing message.  
ICM Max.Time 30 Secs*  
Choose the maximum  
length of incoming  
messages.  
60 Secs  
120 Secs  
180 Secs  
ICM Rec.Monitr On*  
Allows you to turn the  
speaker volume for voice  
messages as they come in  
On or Off.  
Off  
Miscellaneous Mem Security  
Prohibits most functions  
exceptreceivingfaxes into  
memory.  
Distinctive Set(On)  
Off*  
Uses the Telephone  
company's Distinctive  
Ring subscriber service to  
register the ring pattern  
with the machine.  
Area Code  
---  
Set up your 3-digit area  
code only if you do not dial  
it within your own area  
code.  
(USA only)  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
178  
Menu and Features  
Network menu  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
Auto*  
Descriptions  
Network  
Wired LAN  
TCP/IP  
BOOT Method  
Chooses the  
BOOT method  
that best suits  
your needs.  
Static  
RARP  
BOOTP  
C
DHCP  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway  
[000-255].  
Enter the IP  
address.  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
Enter the Subnet  
mask.  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
Enter the  
Gateway  
address.  
Node Name  
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node  
name.  
WINS Config  
Auto*  
Chooses the  
WINS  
configuration  
mode.  
Static  
WINS Server  
DNS Server  
APIPA  
(Primary)  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
Specifies the IP  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
(Primary)  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
Specifies the IP  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-localaddress  
range.  
Off  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
179  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
Auto*  
Descriptions  
Network  
(Continued)  
Wired LAN  
(Continued)  
Ethernet  
Chooses the  
Ethernet link  
mode.  
100B-FD  
100B-HD  
10B-FD  
10B-HD  
MAC Address  
TCP/IP  
You can see your  
machine’s MAC  
address from the  
LCD.  
WLAN  
BOOT Method  
Auto*  
Chooses the  
BOOT method  
that best suits  
your needs.  
Static  
RARP  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255].  
[000-255]  
Enter the IP  
address.  
Enter the Subnet  
mask.  
Enter the  
Gateway  
address.  
Node Name  
BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node  
name.  
WINS Config  
Auto*  
Chooses the  
WINS  
configuration  
mode.  
Static  
WINS Server  
DNS Server  
(Primary)  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
Specifies the IP  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
(Primary)  
Specifies the IP  
000.000.000.000 address of the  
primary or  
(Secondary)  
secondary  
000.000.000.000  
server.  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
180  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Level4  
Options  
On*  
Descriptions  
Network  
(Continued)  
WLAN  
TCP/IP  
APIPA  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-localaddress  
range.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
Off  
Setup Wizard  
SES/WPS/AOSS  
You can  
configure your  
print server.  
C
You can easily  
configure your  
wireless network  
settings using the  
one-button push  
method.  
WPS w/PIN Code  
WLAN Status  
You can easily  
configure your  
wireless network  
settings using  
WPS with a PIN  
code.  
Status  
Signal  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network status.  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network signal  
strength.  
SSID  
You can see the  
current SSID.  
Comm. Mode  
You can see the  
current  
Communication  
Mode.  
MAC Address  
You can see your  
machine’s MAC  
address from the  
LCD.  
Network I/F  
Wired LAN*  
You can choose  
the network  
connection type.  
WLAN  
Network Reset  
Restores all  
wired and  
wireless network  
settings to the  
factory default.  
See Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
181  
MENU  
MENU (  
) (continued)  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Print Reports Transmission  
Help List  
Prints these lists and  
reports.  
Quick Dial  
Alphabetical  
Order  
Numerical Order  
Fax Journal  
User Settings  
Network Config  
Caller ID hist.  
Machine Info. Serial No.  
Lets you check the serial  
number of your machine.  
Initial Setup Receive Mode  
Fax Only*  
Choose the receive mode 44  
that best suits your needs.  
Fax/Tel  
Manual  
Date&Time  
Puts the date and time on See  
the LCD and in headings  
of faxes you send.  
Quick  
Setup  
Guide  
Station ID  
Fax:  
Set your name and fax  
number to appear on each  
page you fax.  
Name:  
Tone/Pulse  
(Canada only)  
Dial Tone  
Tone*  
Choose the dialing mode.  
Pulse  
Detection  
You can shorten the dial  
tone detect pause.  
No Detection*  
High*  
Compatibility  
Adjusts the modem speed 150  
to help resolve  
transmission problems.  
Normal  
Basic(for VoIP)  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
182  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Initial Setup Reset  
Network  
Resets the print server  
back to its factory default  
settings, such as the  
password and IP address  
information.  
(Continued)  
Speed Dial&Fax  
Deletes all stored  
Speed Dial numbers and  
restores the Station ID,  
Quick Dial List,  
C
Transmission Verification  
Report and Fax Journal  
back to the factory default  
settings.  
All Settings  
Resets all the machine’s  
settings back to the  
settings that were set at  
the factory.  
Local Language  
English*  
Allows you to change the See  
LCD language. Quick  
(US only)  
Spanish  
Setup  
Guide  
Local Language  
English*  
Allows you to change the See  
LCD language. Quick  
(Canada only)  
French  
Setup  
Guide  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
183  
Fax (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Record  
You can record your  
conversation.  
(Appears only  
when the handset  
is up or  
Speaker Phone  
is pressed.)  
Volume  
Speaker  
Off  
Adjusts the volume level of  
the speaker.  
(Appears only  
when the handset  
is up or  
Speaker Phone  
is pressed.)  
Low  
Med*  
High  
Low*  
High  
Handset  
Adjusts the handset volume. 26  
Volume Amplify  
On  
For the hearing-impaired,  
you can set the volume to the  
Volume Amplify: On  
setting on a permanent or  
temporary basis.  
(Permanent/  
Temporary)  
Off*  
Fax Resolution  
Standard*  
Fine  
Sets the resolution for  
outgoing faxes.  
S.Fine  
Photo  
Contrast  
Auto*  
Changes the lightness or  
darkness of faxes you send.  
Light  
Dark  
Broadcasting  
Add Number  
You can send the same fax  
message to more than one  
fax number.  
(Does not appear Speed Dial  
when handset is  
up or  
Speaker Phone  
is pressed.)  
Preview  
On  
You can preview a fax  
message before send it.  
Off*  
Delayed Fax  
On(00:00)  
Off*  
Sets the time of day in  
24-hour format that the  
delayed faxes will be sent.  
Batch TX  
On  
Combines delayed faxes to  
the same fax number at the  
same time of day into one  
transmission.  
Off*  
Real Time TX  
On  
You can send a fax without  
using the memory.  
Off*  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
184  
Menu and Features  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
On  
Descriptions  
Page  
Polled TX  
Sets up your machine with  
an document to be retrieved  
by another fax machine.  
Off*  
Polling RX  
On  
Sets up your machine to poll 90  
another fax machine.  
Off*  
On  
Overseas Mode  
If you are having difficulty  
sending faxes overseas, set  
this to On.  
Off*  
C
Glass ScanSize  
Letter*  
Adjust the scan area of the  
scanner glass to the size of  
the document.  
A4  
Set New Default  
Factory Reset  
Call History  
You can save your fax  
settings.  
You can restore all settings  
to the factory settings.  
Outgoing Call Send a fax  
You can choose a number  
from the Outgoing Call  
history and then make a  
telephone call to it, send a  
fax to it, add it to Speed Dial,  
or delete it.  
Make a phone  
call  
More  
Add to Speed  
Dial  
Delete  
Caller ID hist. Send a fax  
You can choose a number  
from the Caller ID history and  
then make a telephone call  
to it, send a fax to it, add it to  
Speed Dial, or delete it.  
Make a phone  
call  
More  
Add to Speed  
Dial  
Delete  
Speed Dial  
More  
Set Speed Dial  
Setup Groups  
Change  
You can set up dial by  
pressing only a few keys.  
You can set up a Group  
numbers for Broadcasting.  
You can change Speed Dial 77  
numbers.  
Delete  
You can delete Speed Dial  
numbers.  
(Press a Speed  
Dial number)  
Send a fax  
You can send a fax after  
pressing Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Make a phone  
call  
You can make a telephone  
call.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
185  
Scan (  
)
Level1  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Descriptions  
Page  
Scan to E-mail  
Scan to Image  
Scan to OCR  
Scan to File  
You can scan a black & white See  
or a color document into your Software  
E-mail application.  
User's  
Guide  
on the  
CD-ROM  
You can scan a color picture  
into your graphics  
application.  
You can have your text  
document converted to an  
editable text file.  
You can scan a black & white  
or a color document into your  
computer.  
Scan to Media Quality  
(when a memory  
card or USB  
Flash memory  
drive is inserted)  
Color 150 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
B/W 200x100 dpi  
B/W 200 dpi  
*
You can choose the scan  
resolution, file format for your  
document.  
File Type  
(If you chose  
color option in  
Quality setting)  
PDF*  
JPEG  
(If you chose  
B&W option in  
Quality setting)  
TIFF  
PDF*  
File Name  
Auto Crop  
You can rename the file.  
On  
Scan multiple documents  
placed on the scanner glass  
to a memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive at a time.  
Off*  
Set New Default  
You can save your scan  
settings as the default  
settings.  
Factory Reset  
You can restore all settings to 119  
the original factory default  
settings.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
186  
Menu and Features  
Copy (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Quality  
Fast  
Choose the Copy resolution 95  
for the next copy.  
Normal*  
Best  
Enlarge/Reduce 100%*  
Enlarge  
C
198% 4"x6"  
186%4"x6"  
i
A4 You can choose the  
enlargement ratio for the  
next copy.  
i
LTR  
LTR  
104% EXE  
i
Reduce  
97% LTR i A4  
93% A4 i LTR  
83% LGL i A4  
78% LGL i LTR  
You can choose the  
reduction ratio for the next  
copy.  
46% LTR  
i
4"x6"  
Fit to Page  
Your machine will adjust  
the size automatically to the  
paper size you set.  
Custom  
(25-400%)  
You can enter an  
enlargement or reduction  
ratio.  
Paper Type  
Plain Paper*  
Inkjet Paper  
Brother BP71  
Other Glossy  
Choose the paper type that 99  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Transparency  
Paper Size  
Letter*  
Choose the paper size that 99  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Legal  
A4  
A5  
4"x6"  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
187  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Brightness  
Adjusts the brightness of  
copies.  
Dark  
Light  
-
2
1
-
0
+
+
1
2
Contrast  
Adjusts the contrast of  
copies.  
-
-
2
1
0
+
+
1
2
Ink Save Mode  
Stack/Sort  
On  
You can save same ink.  
Off*  
Stack*  
Sort  
You can choose to stack or 98  
sort multiple copies.  
Page Layout  
Off(1in1)*  
2in1(P)  
2in1(L)  
4in1(P)  
4in1(L)  
Poster (3 x 3)  
You can make N in 1 or  
Poster copies.  
Book Copy  
On  
Corrects dark borders and  
skew when copying from  
the scanner glass.  
On(Preview)  
(
Skew Adjustment  
)
(Shadow Revise  
)
Off*  
Watermark Copy Use Watermark  
See the  
You can place a logo or text 100  
into your document as a  
Watermark.  
watermark copy  
settings in the  
following table.  
Edit Template  
Use Image  
Scan  
Media  
Favorite  
Settings  
Store  
Favorite:1  
Favorite:2  
Favorite:3  
You can save your Favorite 101  
settings.  
Rename  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
188  
Menu and Features  
Watermark Copy Settings  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
Edit Template  
Text  
CONFIDENTIAL* Places a text into your  
document as a Watermark  
using a template.  
DRAFT  
COPY  
A
Position  
C
B
C
D
E*  
F
G
H
I
Pattern  
Small  
Size  
Medium*  
Large  
-90°  
Angle  
-45°*  
0°  
+45°  
+90°  
Transparency  
-
-
2
1
0
+
+
1
2
Color  
Yellow  
Green  
Orange  
Black*  
Blue  
Red  
Purple  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
189  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
Use Image  
Scan  
Transparency  
Places a logo or text into  
your document as a  
Watermark using a  
scanned image.  
-
2
1
(Set page and  
press start)  
-
0
+
+
1
2
Media  
Position  
A
B
C
D
E*  
F
G
H
I
Places a logo or text into  
your document as a  
Watermark using an image  
from removable media.  
Pattern  
Small  
Size  
Medium*  
Large  
Angle  
-90°  
-45°*  
0°  
+45°  
+90°  
Transparency  
-
-
2
1
0
+
+
1
2
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
190  
Menu and Features  
PhotoCapture (  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
View Photos  
See the print  
settings in the  
following table.  
The machine starts a Slide 107  
Show of your photos.  
(Slide Show)  
Auto Correct  
The machine decides the  
appropriate effect for your  
photo.  
C
You can print all photos in  
your memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive.  
(Print All)  
Enhance Photos Enhance  
See the print  
settings in the  
following table.  
You can adjust your photos 109  
with these settings.  
Auto Correct  
Enhance Skin  
Remove Red-Eye  
Enhance Scenery  
Monochrome  
Sepia  
Auto Correct &  
Remove Red-Eye  
Trim  
You can trim your photo  
and print a part of the  
image.  
Index Print  
Index Sheet  
6 Images/Line  
*
See the print  
settings in the  
following table.  
You can print a thumbnail  
page.  
5 Images/Line  
Print Photos  
You can print an individual 109  
image.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
191  
Print Settings  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
Print Quality Normal  
Choose the print quality.  
(Does not appear Photo*  
for DPOF  
printing.)  
Paper Type  
Plain Paper  
Choose the paper type.  
Inkjet Paper  
Brother BP71  
Other Glossy*  
4"x 6"*  
Paper Size  
(When Letter or  
A4 is chosen)  
Choose the paper and print 112  
size.  
5"x 7"  
3"x 4"  
3.5"x 5"  
4"x 6"  
5"x 7"  
6"x 8"  
Max. Size*  
Letter  
A4  
Brightness  
Adjusts the brightness.  
Dark  
Light  
(Does not appear  
when  
Enhance Photos  
is chosen.)  
-
-
2
1
0
+
+
1
2
Contrast  
Adjusts the contrast.  
(Does not appear  
when  
Enhance Photos  
is chosen.)  
-
-
2
1
0
+
+
1
2
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
192  
Menu and Features  
Option1  
Option2  
Option3  
Option4  
Descriptions  
Page  
True2Life  
On  
White Balance  
Adjusts the hue of the white 113  
areas.  
(Does not appear Off*  
when  
Enhance Photos  
is chosen.)  
-
2
1
-
0
+
+
1
2
C
Sharpness  
Color Density  
Enhances the detail of the  
image.  
-
-
2
1
0
+
+
1
2
Adjusts the total amount of  
color in the image.  
-
-
2
1
0
+
+
1
2
Cropping  
On*  
Crops the image around the 115  
margin to fit the paper size  
or print size. Turn this  
feature off if you want to  
print whole images or  
prevent unwanted  
Off  
cropping.  
Borderless  
Print Date  
On*  
Off  
On  
Expands the printable area 115  
to fit the edges of the paper.  
Prints the date on your  
photo.  
(Does not appear Off*  
when DPOF Print  
is chosen.)  
Set New Default  
You can save your print  
settings.  
Factory Reset  
You can restore all the  
settings to factory settings.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
193  
Speed Dial (  
S p e e d D i a l  
)
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Speed Dial  
More  
Set Speed Dial  
You can set up dial by  
pressing only a few keys.  
Setup Groups  
Change  
You can set up a Group  
numbers for Broadcasting.  
You can change Speed Dial 77  
numbers.  
Delete  
You can delete Speed Dial 77  
numbers.  
(Press a Speed  
Dial number)  
Send a fax  
You can send a fax after  
pressing Black Start or  
Color Start.  
Make a phone  
call  
You can make a telephone 73  
call.  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
Call History (  
)
C a l l H i s t o r y  
Level1  
Level2  
Level3  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Call History  
Outgoing Call Send a fax  
You can choose a number  
from the Outgoing Call  
history and then make a  
telephone call to it, send a  
fax to it, add it to  
Make a phone  
call  
More  
Add to Speed  
Dial  
Speed Dial, or delete it.  
Delete  
Caller ID hist. Send a fax  
You can choose a number  
from the Caller ID history  
and then make a telephone  
call to it, send a fax to it, add  
it to Speed Dial, or delete it.  
Make a phone  
call  
More  
Add to Speed  
Dial  
Delete  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
194  
Menu and Features  
Entering Text  
C
When you are setting certain menu selections, you may need to enter text into the machine.  
Press to choose numbers, letters or special characters. Up to six letters are assigned to each  
button on the LCD.  
By pressing the correct button repeatedly, you can access the character you want.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
C
OK  
Inserting spaces  
C
To enter a space, press  
to choose special characters, then press the space button  
or  
.
Note  
The characters available may differ depending on your country.  
Making corrections  
C
If you entered an incorrect letter and want to change it, use the arrow buttons to move the cursor  
under the incorrect character. Then press . Re-enter the correct character. You can also insert  
letters by moving the cursor and entering a character.  
Repeating letters  
C
If you need to enter a letter that is on the same button as the letter before it, press c to move the  
cursor to the right before you press the same button again.  
195  
 
Specifications  
D
D
General  
D
Printer Type  
Print Method  
Inkjet  
Black:  
Color:  
Piezo with 94 × 1 nozzle  
Piezo with 94 × 3 nozzles  
Memory Capacity  
48 MB  
Touchscreen 5 in. (120.7 mm) Color LCD 1  
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
Touchscreen active area: 4.95 in. (125.96 mm) 1  
AC 100 to 120 V 50/60 Hz  
Power Source  
Power Consumption  
Off Mode:  
Sleep Mode:  
Standby:  
Average 0.55 W  
Average 4.5 W  
Average 7 W  
Operating:  
Average 30 W  
Dimensions  
14.8 in.  
(375 mm)  
7.1 in.  
(180 mm)  
15.4 in.  
14.6 in.  
(390 mm)  
(370 mm)  
18.1 in.  
18.1 in.  
(460 mm)  
(460 mm)  
Weight  
19.0 lb (8.6 kg)  
50 dB or less  
Noise  
Operating:  
Operating:  
Temperature  
50 °F - 95 °F (10 to 35 °C)  
Best Print Quality: 68 °F - 91 °F (20 to 33 °C)  
Operating: 20 - 80% (without condensation)  
Best Print Quality: 20 - 80% (without condensation)  
Humidity  
1
Measured diagonally  
196  
     
Specifications  
ADF (automatic document For best results we recommend:  
feeder)  
Up to 15 pages  
Temperature: 68 °F - 86 °F (20 °C - 30 °C)  
Humidity: 50% - 70%  
Paper: 20 lb (80 g/m2) A4 or Letter size  
D
197  
Print media  
D
Paper Input  
Paper Tray  
Paper Type:  
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper (coated paper),  
Glossy Photo Paper 1, Transparency 1 2 and Envelopes  
Paper Size:  
Letter, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B5,  
envelopes (commercial No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, JE4),  
Photo 4" × 6", Photo 2L 5" × 7", Index card and  
Postcard 3  
Width: 3 7/8 in. (98 mm) - 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Length: 5.8 in. (148 mm) - 14 in. (355.6 mm)  
For more details, see Paper weight, thickness and  
Maximum paper tray capacity:  
Approx. 100 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) plain paper  
Photo Bypass Tray (USA)  
Photo Paper Tray (Canada)  
Paper type:  
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper (coated paper) and Glossy  
Paper 1  
Paper size:  
Photo 4 × 6 in. and Photo L 3.5 × 5 in.  
Width: 3.5 in. (89 mm) - 4.0 in. (101.6 mm)  
Length: 5.0 in. (127 mm) - 6.0 in. (152.4 mm)  
Maximum paper tray capacity:  
Up to 20 sheets  
Up to 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) plain paper (face up print  
delivery to the output paper tray cover) 1  
Paper Output  
1
For glossy photo paper or transparencies, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray cover  
immediately after they exit the machine to avoid smudging.  
2
3
Use only transparencies recommended for inkjet printing.  
198  
         
Specifications  
Fax  
D
Compatibility  
Coding System  
Modem Speed  
ITU-T Super Group 3  
MH/MR/MMR/JPEG  
Automatic Fallback  
33600 bps  
Document Size  
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 8.5 in. (148 mm to 215.9 mm)  
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 14 in. (148 mm to 355.6 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
8.2 in. (208 mm) (Letter)  
8.2 in. (208 mm)  
D
Scanning Width  
Printing Width  
Gray Scale  
Levels : 64 (Black & White) / 256 (Color)  
Standard, Sequential: (Black only)  
Automatic/Light/Dark  
Polling Types  
Contrast Control  
(manual setting)  
Resolution  
Horizontal 203 dot/in. (8 dot/mm)  
Vertical  
Standard  
98 line/in. (3.85 line/mm) (Black)  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Color)  
Fine  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Black/Color)  
Photo  
196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm) (Black)  
Superfine  
392 line/in. (15.4 line/mm) (Black)  
100 stations × 2 numbers  
Up to 6  
Speed Dial  
Groups  
Broadcasting 1  
Automatic Redial  
Ring Delay  
250 stations  
1 time after 5 minutes  
0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings  
Communication Source Public switched telephone network  
199  
 
Up to 480 2/400 3 pages  
Up to 480 2/400 3 pages  
Memory Transmission  
Out of Paper Reception  
Black & White only  
1
2
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘Brother Standard Chart No. 1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code).  
Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
3
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code). Specifications  
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
200  
     
Specifications  
Message Center  
D
Message Center  
Yes  
ICM Recording Time  
Max. 29 minutes / Max. 99 messages  
(Max.180 secs / 1 message)  
Toll Saver  
Yes  
Recording Conversation  
OGM  
Yes  
Yes  
D
OGM Recording Time  
20 secs  
201  
 
Copy  
D
Color/Black  
Yes/Yes  
Document Size  
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 8.5 in. (148 mm to 215.9 mm)  
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 14 in. (148 mm to 355.6 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Copy Width: Max. 8.26 in. (210 mm)  
Stacks/Sorts up to 99 pages  
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)  
(Black & White)  
Multiple Copies  
Enlarge/Reduce  
Resolution  
Scans up to 1200 × 1200 dpi  
Prints up to 1200 × 1200 dpi  
(Color)  
Scans up to 600 × 1200 dpi  
Prints up to 600 × 1200 dpi  
Yes  
Ink Save Mode  
202  
 
Specifications  
PhotoCapture Center®  
D
Compatible Media 1  
CompactFlash® (4 MB - 16 GB)  
(Type I only)  
(Microdrive™ is not compatible)  
(Compact I/O cards such as Compact LAN card and Compact  
Modem card are not supported.)  
Memory Stick™ (16 MB - 128 MB)  
Memory Stick PRO™ (256 MB - 16 GB)  
(Not available for music data with MagicGate™)  
Memory Stick Duo™ with adapter (16 MB - 128 MB)  
Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™) with adapter  
D
SD 2  
SDHC 3  
microSD with adapter  
miniSD with adapter  
xD-Picture Card™ 4  
USB Flash memory drive 5  
Resolution  
Up to 1200 × 2400 dpi  
File Extension  
(Media Format)  
(Image Format)  
DPOF (ver.1.0, ver.1.1), Exif DCF (up to ver.2.1)  
Photo Print: JPEG 6  
Scan to Media: JPEG, PDF (Color)  
TIFF, PDF (Black)  
True2Life®  
Color Enhancement  
Photo Enhance  
Auto Correct, Enhance Skin-Tone, Enhance Scenery,  
Trimming, Slide Show, Remove Red-Eye, Monochrome and  
Sepia  
Number of Files  
Up to 999 files  
(The folder inside memory cards or USB Flash memory drive is  
also counted)  
Folder  
File must be stored in the 4th folder level of the memory card or  
USB Flash memory drive.  
Letter, A4, Photo 4" × 6", Photo 5" × 7" 7  
Borderless  
1
2
3
4
Memory cards, adapters and USB Flash memory drive are not included.  
16 MB to 2 GB  
4 GB to 16 GB  
xD-Picture Card™ Conventional Card from 16 MB to 512 MB  
xD-Picture Card™ Type M from 256 MB to 2 GB  
xD-Picture Card™ Type M+ 1 GB and 2 GB  
xD-Picture Card™ Type H from 256 MB to 2 GB  
203  
         
5
USB 2.0 Standard  
USB Mass Storage standard from 16 MB to 32 GB  
Support format: FAT12/FAT16/FAT32  
6
7
Progressive JPEG format is not supported.  
204  
     
Specifications  
PictBridge  
D
Compatibility  
Supports the Camera & Imaging Products Association  
PictBridge standard CIPA DC-001.  
VIsit http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge for more information.  
USB direct interface  
Interface  
D
205  
 
Scanner  
D
Color/Black  
Yes/Yes  
Yes (Windows® 2000 Professional/Windows® XP/  
TWAIN Compliant  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista®)  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 - 10.4.x - 10.5.x 1  
Yes (Windows® XP 2/Windows Vista®)  
36 bit color Processing (Input)  
WIA Compliant  
Color Depth  
24 bit color Processing (Output)  
(Actual Input: 30 bit color/Actual Output: 24 bit color)  
Up to 19200 × 19200 dpi (interpolated) 3  
Up to 1200 × 2400 dpi (optical) (Scanner Glass)  
Up to 1200 × 600 dpi (optical) (ADF)  
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 8.5 in. (148 mm to 215.9 mm)  
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 14 in. (148 mm to 355.6 mm)  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)  
Up to 8.26 in. (210 mm)  
Resolution  
Document Size  
Scanning Width  
Gray Scale  
256 levels  
Auto Crop  
Yes  
1
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com.  
2
Windows® XP in this User’s Guide includes Windows® XP Home Edition, Windows® XP Professional, and Windows®  
XP Professional x64 Edition.  
3
Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning when using the WIA Driver for Windows® XP and Windows Vista® (resolution up  
to 19200 × 19200 dpi can be selected by using the Brother scanner utility)  
206  
         
Specifications  
Printer  
D
Windows® 2000 Professional/Windows® XP/  
Printer Driver  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/  
Windows Vista®/Windows Server® 2003 1/  
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 1/  
Windows Server® 2008 1 driver supporting Brother  
Native Compression mode  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 - 10.4.x - 10.5.x 2: Brother Ink Driver  
Up to 1200 × 6000 dpi  
1200 × 2400 dpi  
D
Resolution  
1200 × 1200 dpi  
600 × 1200 dpi  
600 × 600 dpi  
600 × 300 dpi  
600 × 150 dpi (Color)  
450 × 150 dpi (Black & White)  
8.26 in. [8.5 in. (borderless) 3] 5  
Letter, A4, A6, Photo 4" × 6", Index Card,  
Photo L 3.5" × 5", Photo 2L 5" × 7", Postcard 4  
Yes  
Printing Width  
Borderless  
Ink Save Mode  
1
Print only via network.  
2
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com.  
When the Borderless feature is set to On.  
3
4
5
When printing on letter size paper.  
207  
           
Interfaces  
D
USB  
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet  
(2 m). 1 2  
LAN 3  
Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.  
Wireless LAN  
Your machine supports IEEE 802.11b/g wireless communication  
with your wireless LAN using Infrastructure mode or a wireless  
Peer-to-Peer connection in Ad-hoc Mode.  
1
Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a  
USB 1.1 interface.  
2
3
Third party USB ports are not supported.  
See Network (LAN) on page 211 and the Network User's Guide for detailed network specifications.  
208  
       
Specifications  
Computer requirements  
D
SUPPORTED OPERATING SYSTEMS AND SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS  
Hard Disk Space to install  
For  
Drivers Applications  
Computer Platform &  
Operating System  
Version  
Supported  
PCSoftware  
Functions  
Processor  
Minimum  
Speed  
PC  
Interface  
Minimum  
RAM  
Recommended  
RAM  
For  
®
®
®
Windows  
Windows® 2000  
Professional  
Printing,  
USB,  
64 MB 256 MB 110 MB 340 MB  
Intel Pentium II  
Operating  
or equivalent  
10/100  
System  
Scanning,  
Removable  
Windows® XP  
Home 2 5  
Base-TX  
(Ethernet),  
Wireless  
802.11b/g  
128 MB  
110 MB 340 MB  
D
Disk  
Windows® XP  
Professional  
®
Windows® XP  
Professional x64  
64-bit (Intel 64 or  
256 MB 512 MB 110 MB 340 MB  
512 MB 1 GB 600 MB 530 MB  
AMD64) supported  
CPU  
Edition  
Intel® Pentium® 4  
or equivalent  
Windows  
Vista® 2  
®
64-bit (Intel 64 or  
AMD64) supported CPU  
®
Intel®  
Printing  
10/100  
256 MB 512 MB 50 MB  
N/A  
Windows Server  
Base-TX  
(Ethernet),  
Wireless  
802.11b/g  
Pentium®III or  
equivalent  
2003 (print only via  
network)  
®
®
Windows Server  
64-bit (Intel 64 or  
2003 x64 Edition  
(print only via network)  
AMD64) supported CPU  
®
®
®
512 MB 2 GB  
Windows Server  
Intel Pentium 4or  
equivalent 64-bit  
2008 (print only via  
network)  
®
(Intel 64or AMD64)  
supported CPU  
®
USB 3,  
PowerPC G4/G5  
Macintosh Mac OS X  
Operating 10.3.9 - 10.4.3  
System  
Printing,  
PC Fax  
128 MB 256 MB 80 MB 400 MB  
PowerPC® G3  
350MHz  
10/100  
Send ,  
Base-TX  
(Ethernet),  
Wireless  
802.11b/g  
Scanning,  
Removable  
®
Mac OS X  
10.4.4 -10.5.x  
512 MB 1 GB  
PowerPC G4/G5  
Intel® Core™  
Processor  
Disk  
Conditions:  
1
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 5.5 or greater.  
For WIA, 1200 × 1200 resolution. Brother Scanner  
Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 × 19200 dpi.  
Third party USB ports are not supported.  
For the latest driver updates, visit:  
2
(in USA)  
3
4
5
(in Canada)  
PC Fax supports black and white only.  
All trademarks, brand and product names are property  
of their respective companies.  
PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft® SP4 or  
higher for Windows® 2000 and SP2 or higher for XP.  
6
Removable disk is a function of PhotoCapture  
Center®.  
209  
               
Consumable items  
D
Ink  
The machine uses individual Black, Yellow, Cyan and Magenta ink  
cartridges that are separate from the print head assembly.  
Service Life of Ink  
Cartridge  
Starter ink cartridges are in the box. The first time you install the ink  
cartridges the machine will use extra ink to fill the ink delivery tubes.  
This is a one-time process that enables high quality printing.  
Afterward, replacement ink cartridges will print the specified  
number of pages. Starter cartridge yield is approx. 65% of the yield  
of the LC61 replacement cartridge.  
Replacement  
Consumables  
<Black> LC61BK, <Cyan> LC61C,  
<Magenta> LC61M, <Yellow> LC61Y  
Black - Approximately 450 pages 1  
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow - Approximately 325 pages 1  
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us  
1
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 24711.  
What is Innobella™?  
Innobella™ is a range of genuine consumables offered by Brother.  
The name "Innobella™" derives from the words "Innovation" and  
"Bella" (meaning "Beautiful" in Italian) and is a representation of the  
"innovative" technology providing you with "beautiful" and "long  
lasting" print results.  
When you print photo images, Brother recommends Innobella™  
glossy photo paper (BP71 series) for high quality. Brilliant prints are  
made easier with Innobella™ Ink and paper.  
210  
     
Specifications  
Network (LAN)  
D
LAN  
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,  
Network Scanning, PC Fax Send, PC Fax Receive (Windows® only),  
Remote Setup and Removable Disk 1. Also included is Brother  
BRAdmin Light 2 Network Management software.  
Windows® 2000 Professional/Windows® XP/  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista®/  
Windows Server® 2003 3/Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 3/  
Windows Server® 2008 3  
Support for  
D
Mac OS X 10.3.9 - 10.4.x - 10.5.x 4  
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation (Wired LAN)  
IEEE 802.11 b/g (Wireless LAN)  
Protocols  
TCP/IP:  
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP,  
APIPA (Auto IP), NetBIOS/WINS, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, DNS Resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, FTP Server,  
TELNET, SNMPv1, TFTP, Scanner Port,  
LLTD responder, Web Services (Printing)  
Network Security  
SSID/ESSID, 128 (104) / 64 (40) bit WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES),  
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)  
Setup Support Utility SecureEasySetup™ Yes (simple setup with your  
(one-push  
configuration)  
SecureEasySetup™-capable access  
point/router)  
AOSS™  
WPS  
Yes (simple setup with your AOSS™-capable  
access point/router)  
Yes (simple setup with your Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup-capable access point/router)  
1
2
See the Computer Requirements chart on page 209.  
If you require more advanced printer management, use the latest Brother BRAdmin Professional utility version that is  
available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com.  
3
4
Print only via network.  
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com.  
211  
           
Wireless one-push configuration  
D
If your wireless access point supports either SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup (PBC 1)  
or AOSS™, you can configure the machine easily without a computer. By pushing a button on the  
wireless LAN router / access point and the machine, you can set up the wireless network and  
security settings. See the user’s guide for your wireless LAN router / access point for instructions  
on how to access one-push mode.  
1
Push Button Configuration  
Note  
Access points/routers that support SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup or AOSS™  
have the symbols shown below.  
212  
   
Glossary  
E
E
This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of  
these features depends on the model you purchased.  
ADF (automatic document feeder)  
CNG tones  
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax  
The document can be placed in the ADF  
and scanned one page at a time  
automatically.  
machines during automatic transmission  
to tell the receiving machine that a fax  
machine is calling.  
Auto Reduction  
Coding method  
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.  
Method of coding the information  
contained in the document. All fax  
machines must use a minimum standard  
of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine  
is capable of greater compression  
methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified  
Modified Read (MMR) and JPEG, if the  
receiving machine has the same  
capability.  
Automatic fax transmission  
E
Sending a fax without picking up the  
handset of an external telephone.  
Automatic Redial  
A feature that enables your machine to  
redial the last fax number after five  
minutes if the fax did not go through  
because the line was busy.  
Communication error (Comm. Error)  
Backup Print  
An error during fax sending or receiving,  
usually caused by line noise or static.  
Your machine prints a copy of every fax  
that is received and stored in memory.  
This is a safety feature so you will not lose  
messages during a power failure.  
Compatibility group  
The ability of one fax unit to communicate  
with another. Compatibility is assured  
between ITU-T Groups.  
Batch Transmission  
(Black & white faxes only) As a cost  
saving feature, all delayed faxes to the  
same fax number can be sent as one  
transmission.  
Contrast  
Setting to compensate for dark or light  
documents, by making faxes or copies of  
dark documents lighter and light  
documents darker.  
Beeper Volume  
Volume setting for the beep when you  
press a key or make an error.  
Delayed Fax  
Brightness  
Sends your fax at a specified time later.  
Changing the Brightness makes the whole  
image lighter or darker.  
Distinctive Ring  
A subscriber service purchased from the  
telephone company that gives you  
another telephone number on an existing  
telephone line. The Brother machine uses  
the new number to simulate a dedicated  
fax line.  
Broadcasting  
The ability to send the same fax message  
to more than one location.  
Caller ID  
A service purchased from the telephone  
company that lets you see the number (or  
name) of the party calling you.  
213  
 
Dual Access  
Fax/Tel  
You can receive faxes and telephone  
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or  
scheduled jobs into memory at the same  
time it is sending a fax from memory or  
receiving or printing an incoming fax.  
calls. Do not use this mode if you are  
using a telephone answering device  
(TAD).  
Easy Receive  
Fine resolution  
Enables your machine to respond to CNG  
tones if you interrupt a fax call by  
answering it.  
Resolution is 203 × 196 dpi. It is used for  
small print and graphs.  
Gray Scale  
ECM (Error Correction Mode)  
The shades of gray available for copying,  
scanning and faxing photographs.  
Detects errors during fax transmission  
and resends the pages of the fax that had  
an error.  
Group number  
A combination of Speed Dial numbersthat  
are stored in a Speed Dial location for  
Broadcasting.  
Extension telephone  
A telephone using the same line as your  
fax but plugged into a separate wall jack.  
Help list  
External telephone  
A printout of the complete Menu table that  
you can use to program your machine  
when you do not have the User's Guide  
with you.  
A telephone that is plugged into the EXT  
jack of your machine.  
F/T Ring Time  
Innobella™  
The length of time that the Brother  
machine rings (when the Receive Mode  
setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up  
a voice call that it answered.  
Innobella™ is a range of genuine  
consumables offered by Brother. For best  
quality results Brother recommends  
Innobella™ Ink and Paper.  
Fax Forwarding  
Journal Period  
Sends a fax received into the memory to  
another pre-programmed fax number.  
The pre-programmed time period  
between automatically printed Fax  
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax  
Journal on demand without interrupting  
the cycle.  
Fax Journal  
Lists information about the last  
200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX  
means Transmit. RX means Receive.  
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
Fax Receive Code  
The display screen on the machine that  
shows interactive messages during On-  
Screen Programming and shows the date  
and time when the machine is idle.  
Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer  
a fax call on an extension or external  
telephone.  
Fax Storage  
Manual fax  
You can store received faxes in memory.  
Depending on your model, you can lift the  
handset, or handset of the external  
telephone or you can press  
Speaker Phone to hear the receiving fax  
machine answer before you press  
Black Start or Color Start to begin  
sending.  
Fax tones  
The signals sent by sending and receiving  
fax machines while communicating  
information.  
214  
Glossary  
Menu mode  
Programming mode for changing your  
Pulse (Canada only)  
A form of rotary dialing on a telephone  
line.  
machine's settings.  
OCR (optical character recognition)  
Quick Dial List  
The bundled ScanSoft™ PaperPort™  
11SE with OCR or Presto! PageManager  
software application converts an image of  
text to text you can edit.  
A listing of names and numbers stored in  
Speed Dial memory, in numerical order.  
Real Time Transmission  
When memory is full, you can send faxes  
in real time.  
Output Paper Reception  
Receives faxes into the machine's  
memory when the machine is out of paper.  
Remaining jobs  
You can check which jobs are waiting in  
memory and cancel jobs individually.  
Overseas Mode  
E
Makes temporary changes to the fax  
tones to accommodate noise and static on  
overseas telephone lines.  
Remote Access Code  
Your own 4-digit code (---l) that allows  
you to call and access your machine from  
a remote location.  
Paging  
This feature enables your machine to call  
your cell phone or pager when a fax is  
received into its memory. The machine will  
also page for voice messages.  
Remote Retrieval Access  
The ability to access your machine  
remotely from a touch tone telephone.  
Resolution  
Pause  
The number of vertical and horizontal lines  
per inch. See: Standard, Fine, Super Fine  
and Photo.  
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in  
the dialing sequence while you are dialing  
using the dial pad or while you are storing  
Speed Dial numbers. Press the Pause  
key on the control panel or the Pause  
button on the LCD as many times as  
needed for longer pauses.  
Ring Delay  
The number of rings before the machine  
answers in Fax Onlyand Fax/Tel  
modes.  
Photo resolution (B&W only)  
Ring Volume  
A resolution setting that uses varying  
shades of gray for the best representation  
of photographs.  
Volume setting for the machine's ring.  
Scan to Media  
You can scan a black & white or color  
document into a memory card or USB  
Flash memory drive. Black & whiteimages  
can be in TIFF or PDF file format and color  
images can be in PDF or JPEG file format.  
PhotoCapture Center®  
Allows you to print digital photos from your  
digital camera at high resolution for photo  
quality printing.  
Scanning  
PictBridge  
The process of sending an electronic  
image of a paper document into your  
computer.  
Allows you to print photos directly from  
your digital camera at high resolution for  
photo quality printing.  
Search  
Polling  
An electronic, numerical or alphabetical  
listing of stored Speed Dial and Group  
numbers.  
The process of a fax machine calling  
another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax  
messages.  
215  
Speed Dial  
A pre-programmed number for easy  
User Settings  
A printed report that shows the current  
settings of the machine.  
dialing. You must press Speed Dial, the  
two digit code, and Black Start or  
Color Start to start the dialing process.  
Standard resolution  
203 × 97 dpi. It is used for regular size text  
and quickest transmission.  
Station ID  
The stored information that appears on  
the top of faxed pages. It includes the  
sender's name and fax number.  
Super Fine resolution (B&W)  
392 × 203 dpi. Best for very small print  
and line art.  
TAD (telephone answering device)  
You can connect an external device or  
answering machine to the EXT. jack of  
your machine.  
Telephone Answer Code  
(For Fax/Tel mode only)  
When the machine answers a voice call, it  
pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at  
an extension telephone by pressing this  
code (# 5 1).  
Temporary settings  
You can choose certain options for each  
fax transmission and copy without  
changing the default settings.  
Tone  
A form of dialing on the telephone line  
used for Touch Tone telephones.  
Transmission  
The process of sending faxes over the  
phone lines from your machine to the  
receiving fax machine.  
Transmission Verification Report  
A listing for the last fax sent, that shows its  
date, time and number.  
True2Life®  
Adjusts the color in the image for better  
print quality by improving sharpness,  
white balance and color density.  
216  
Index  
F
ControlCenter  
A
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Copy  
Access codes, storing and dialing ............80  
Accessories and supplies .......................... ii  
ADF (automatic document feeder) .... 21, 34  
Answering machine (TAD) .......................66  
Apple Macintosh  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Automatic  
Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ........... 71  
Custom telephone features  
F
B
setting up Groups for ............................78  
Brother  
accessories and supplies ........................ ii  
FAQs (frequently asked questions) .........i  
D
Dialing  
C
access codes and credit card  
Canceling  
Cleaning  
Connecting  
Direct printing  
from a non-PictBridge camera ........... 122  
from a PictBridge camera ................... 120  
Document  
external TAD  
(answering machine) ..................... 66, 67  
two-line external TAD or telephone ......69  
Control panel overview ..............................6  
217  
 
Fax, stand-alone  
E
at end of conversation .................46, 56  
F/T Ring Time, setting ....................... 47  
from extension telephone ............70, 71  
from external telephone .................... 70  
out of paper reception ....................... 56  
printing from memory ........................ 57  
reducing to fit on paper ..................... 56  
retrieving from a remote site ........59, 60  
telephone line interference .............. 150  
at end of conversation ....................... 43  
canceling from memory ..................... 41  
delayed batch transmission ............... 41  
from memory (Dual Access) .............. 40  
Real Time Transmission .................... 40  
return to factory setting ..................... 42  
telephone line interference .............. 150  
Fax/Tel mode  
Error messages on LCD ........................151  
while scanning a document ..............102  
Extension telephone, using ......................70  
External telephone, connecting ................70  
F
Fax codes  
Fax Receive Code ...................48, 70, 71  
Telephone Answer Code ............... 70, 71  
Fax Forwarding  
programming a number .........................49  
Fax, from PC  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
answering at extension  
Telephone Answer Code ................70, 71  
218  
G
M
Groups for Broadcasting ..........................78  
Macintosh  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Maintenance, routine  
replacing ink cartridges ...................... 162  
Manual  
Message Center mode  
H
Help  
using Mode and menu keys .............174  
I
Ink cartridges  
Fax/Tel announcement (F/T OGM) ...... 82  
outgoing message (Msg Ctr OGM) ...... 81  
playing voice messages ...........83, 84, 85  
recording a conversation ...................... 84  
Mode, entering  
F
Multi-line connections (PBX) ................... 69  
J
Jacks  
Convert to RJ11 jack triplex adapter .....68  
EXT  
Jams  
N
Network  
Printing  
See Network User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Scanning  
L
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
LCD (liquid crystal display) ............... 6, 174  
O
Out of Area (Caller ID) ............................. 65  
Outgoing Message (Msg Ctr OGM) ......... 81  
219  
Printing  
P
Scan to Media  
Packing and shipping the machine ........171  
loading envelopes and postcards .........12  
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
PictBridge  
Presto! PageManager  
See Help in Presto! PageManager  
application.  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM and Help in the PaperPort™  
11SE application to access How-to-Guides.  
Photo Bypass Tray (USA) ........................14  
Photo Paper Tray (Canada) .....................14  
PhotoCapture Center®  
Print  
Print settings  
Scan to Media  
Printing  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
CompactFlash® ...................................104  
Enhance Photos  
from PC  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Programming your machine .................. 174  
Print settings  
Q
Quick Dial  
Return to factory setting ...................116  
Access codes and credit card  
Group dial  
setting up Groups for Broadcasting ... 78  
220  
Speed Dial  
S
setting up by 2-digit location ..............75  
setting up from Caller ID history ........76  
setting up from outgoing calls ............76  
Scanning  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Serial Number  
R
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternative Number  
Speed Dial  
Receive Mode  
Reducing  
Remote Setup  
F
T
TAD (telephone answering device),  
Telephone Handset installation ............. 169  
Telephone line  
two-line telephone system .................... 68  
Transferring your faxes or Fax  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Network Configuration ..........................89  
Transmission Verification ............... 88, 89  
Resolution  
Transparencies .............17, 18, 19, 20, 198  
221  
error messages on LCD ......................151  
if you are having difficulty  
phone line or connections ................144  
PhotoCapture Center® .....................148  
printing received faxes .....................143  
Two-line telephone system ......................68  
V
Volume, setting  
volume amplify  
(for hearing -impaired) .......................27  
W
Windows®  
See Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Wireless Network  
See Quick Setup Guide and Network  
User's Guide on the CD-ROM.  
222  
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS  
(Canada only)  
NOTICE  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.  
NOTICE  
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to  
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices  
does not exceed five.  
Brother International Corporation  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
P.O. Box 6911  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.  
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,  
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6  
Visit us on the World Wide Web  
These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using  
them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and  
the power requirements of your multi-function center may not be compatible with the power  
available in foreign countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and  
may void your warranty.  

Brada Appliances MPN1 08CR User Manual
Brother I FAX MFC 8460N User Manual
Brother Inkjet Multifunction Printer MFCJ4610DW User Manual
Carrier 50HJ004 User Manual
Dakota Digital DHC 2100 User Manual
Energy Tech Laboratories DHG240 User Manual
Epson All in One Printer CX7400 User Manual
Friedrich Air Conditioner US14B30A User Manual
GE J SERIES AJM10AF User Manual
Hitachi UC 18YG User Manual